w-640s-IP-5620 5520 MM 05 E

IP-5620/5520
Solvent Ink Color Inkjet Printer

Maintenance Manual
U00122916305
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
U00122916300 March 2011

U00122916301 May 2011
U00122916302 September 2011
U00122916303 July 2012
U00122916304 December 2012
U00122916305 March 2013
Copyright © 2013 by Seiko I Infotech Inc.
All rights reserved. Seiko I Infotech Inc. reserves the right to make
changes without notice to the specifications and materials contained
herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential)
caused by reliance on the materials presented, including
but not limited to typographical, arithmetic, or listing errors.
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Introduction
This maintenance manual applies to the following four printer models:

- IP-5620 (64 inches, 6 color specifications)
Depending on the purchasing area, some printers may not be mentioned above, but, unless
specified otherwise, this manual content covers all printer models.
Also, specific explanation is provided for maintenance items that differ depending on models.
Caution (make sure to read the following)

Always disconnect the power cord from the power outlet when performing operation inside
the controller box. Operating inside the controller box with the power cord plugged may
cause electrical shock.
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 1 OVERVIEW OF MAINTENANCE WORKFLOW
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 OVERVIEW OF MAINTENANCE WORKFLOW 1-1

1.1 Maintenance Workflow ......................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Necessary Tools ................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 External Views and Part Names ........................................................... 1-4
1.4 Maintenance Space .............................................................................. 1-9
SECTION 2 INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE 1
2.1 Changing the Number of Ink Colors ......................................................... 2
2.1.1 Colors Number Change Procedure (4 colors to 6 colors) .......................................... 2
2.1.2 Color Number Setting Change Procedure ................................................................. 3
2.2 Procedure to Replace Printer's Ink between EG-Outdoor GX and

EG-Outdoor IX ........................................................................................ 6
2.2.1 Changing between GX ink and IX ink ........................................................................ 6
2.2.2 Changing between GX ink and neon ink ................................................................. 25
2.2.3 Change between IX ink and neon ink .....................................................53

2.3 Changing to the Take-up Reel Unit with Rear Sensor .............................54
2.3.1 New type (with rear sensor) part list ........................................................................ 54
2.3.2 Removing the previous type (without rear sensor) .................................................. 55
2.3.3 Checking and setting the firmware version .............................................................. 59
SECTION 3 OPERATIONS AND FUNCTIONS OF MAINTENANCE

MODE MENU 3-1
3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Maintenance Mode ............................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Basic Menu Operation .......................................................................... 3-3
3.3.1 Menu tree ............................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Menu Operation .................................................................................. 3-15

3.4.1 M.ADJ Menu......................................................................................................... 3-15
3.4.2 PH.MAIN Menu .................................................................................................... 3-17
3.4.3 PRINTER Menu.................................................................................................... 3-23
3.4.4 NOZZLE POS ADJ Menu ..................................................................................... 3-28
1-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.5 ADJUST Menu ..................................................................................................... 3-31

3.4.6 SETUP Menu ....................................................................................................... 3-34
3.4.7 HEATER Menu ..................................................................................................... 3-37
3.4.8 TEST PRINT (Displayed in the maintenance mode only) ..................................... 3-38
3.4.9 VOLT (Displayed in the maintenance mode only) ................................................ 3-41
3.4.10 SENSORS (Displayed in the maintenance mode only) ....................................... 3-42
3.4.11 MOTORS (Displayed in the maintenance mode only) ......................................... 3-47
3.4.12 COUNTER (Displayed in the maintenance mode only) ....................................... 3-55
3.4.13 ELECT (Displayed in the maintenance mode only) ............................................. 3-58
3.4.14 PH.INF (Displayed in the maintenance mode only) ............................................. 3-62
3.5 Special Operations ............................................................................. 3-63

3.5.1 Language Setting Mode ....................................................................................... 3-63
3.5.2 Installation Start Skip Mode .................................................................................. 3-63
3.5.3 POC Skip Mode (Not available to users) .............................................................. 3-64
3.5.4 Fatal Error Neglect Mode (Not available to users)................................................ 3-64
3.6 Operation Guidance............................................................................ 3-65

3.6.1 Starting Language Setting .................................................................................... 3-65
3.6.2 Starting Installation ............................................................................................... 3-68
3.7 Management of System Information ................................................... 3-71
SECTION 4 TROUBLESHOOTING (GENERAL) 4-1

4.1 Check Items on the Occurrence of Problem ......................................... 4-1
4.2 Measures to be Taken when the Printer Malfunctions ........................... 4-2
4.3 Measures to Solve Print Quality Problems ............................................ 4-2
4.4 Check Items for Heater Errors .............................................................. 4-3
SECTION 5 TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE SECTION AND USB

CONTROLLER SECTION) 5-1
5.1 Poor Print Quality ................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Error Message Types ............................................................................ 5-3
5.3 Operator Call Errors.............................................................................. 5-4
5.4 Warning .............................................................................................. 5-10
5.4.1 Daily Maintenance Warning .................................................................................. 5-10
5.4.2 Wiper Blade Life Warning ..................................................................................... 5-10
5.4.3 Wiper Sponge Life Warning .................................................................................. 5-10
5.4.4 Wiper Cleaning Liquid Replacement Warning ...................................................... 5-10
5.4.5 Cleaning Non Execution Warning ..........................................................................5-11
5.4.6 Media Wrinkles Warning........................................................................................5-11
5.4.7 Ink Shortage Warning ............................................................................................5-11
1-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.4.8 Take-up Time-out Warning ....................................................................................5-11
5.5 System Errors ..................................................................................... 5-12

5.5.1 System Error 1010: ATG/RSM loading error......................................................... 5-14
5.5.2 System Error 1011: PTG loading error ................................................................. 5-14
5.5.3 System Error 1100: Flash ROM error ................................................................... 5-14
5.5.4 System Error 1101: ATG/RSM error ..................................................................... 5-15
5.5.5 System Error 1102: FFC error .............................................................................. 5-15
5.5.6 System Error 1103: TRC connection error............................................................ 5-16
5.5.7 System Error 1104: JUN connection error ............................................................ 5-16
5.5.8 System Error 1105: PTG error .............................................................................. 5-17
5.5.9 System Error 1106: Power error ........................................................................... 5-17
5.5.10 System Error 1107: Carriage I/F error ................................................................. 5-19
5.5.11 System Error 1108: USB error ............................................................................. 5-19
5.5.12 System Error 1109: EEPROM error ..................................................................... 5-20
5.5.13 System Error 110A: Band memory error ............................................................. 5-21
5.5.14 System error 110B: Cap position adjustment value error .................................... 5-21
5.5.15 System error 1110: ATG block clear error ............................................................ 5-21
5.5.16 System Error 112X: Suction fan error .................................................................. 5-22
5.5.17 System Error 1130: ATG DMA error..................................................................... 5-22
5.5.18 System Error 1140: Flash I/O error...................................................................... 5-23
5.5.19 System Error 1150: Home position detection error .............................................. 5-23
5.5.20 System Error 1160: Wiping error ......................................................................... 5-24
5.5.21 System Error 1170: Ambient temperature error ................................................... 5-25
5.5.22 System Error 1180: Pump/wipe motor overcurrent .............................................. 5-25
5.5.23 System Error 119X: Head drive voltage error ...................................................... 5-26
5.5.24 System Error 11A0: EEPROM I/O error .............................................................. 5-27
5.5.25 System Error 11D0: Head cooling fan error ......................................................... 5-27
5.5.26 System Error 11E0: Long-time storage error ....................................................... 5-28
5.5.27 System Error 11F0: Y motor cooling fan failure ................................................... 5-28
5.5.28 System Error 120X: Head drive IC temperature error ......................................... 5-29
5.5.29 System Error 1220: Edge sensor error ................................................................ 5-29
5.5.30 System Error 126X: FFC error............................................................................. 5-30
5.5.31 System Error 1310: Cap sensor error.................................................................. 5-31
5.5.32 System Error 140X: Heater thermistor error ........................................................ 5-31
5.5.33 System Error 141X: Heater error (High temperature) .......................................... 5-32
5.5.34 System Error 143X: Heater error (Low temperature)........................................... 5-33
5.5.35 System error 144x: Heater error (No interruption) ............................................... 5-34
5.5.36 System error 150X: Head thermistor error .......................................................... 5-35
5.5.37 System error 160X: Head heater error (High temperature) ................................. 5-36
5.5.38 System error 161X: Head heater error (Target temperature not reached) ........... 5-37
5.5.39 System error 2000-6000...................................................................................... 5-38
5.6 Firmware Program Upgrade ............................................................... 5-39

5.6.1 Upgrading from CF ............................................................................................... 5-39
5.6.2 Online Upgrading ................................................................................................. 5-42
5.7 Upload/download ................................................................................ 5-44

5.7.1 Upload .................................................................................................................. 5-44
1-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.7.2 Download ............................................................................................................. 5-44
5.8 Settings when Replacing Engine Board (LEECV) ............................... 5-45

5.9 No Error Message Appears................................................................. 5-47
5.9.1 No display ............................................................................................................ 5-47
5.10 Replacing the Battery (LEECV Board)................................................ 5-48
SECTION 6 REPLACEMENT OF PARTS

(DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY) 6-1
6.1 Rules for Disassembly and Reassembly Procedures ............................ 6-1
6.2 Parts Name........................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Names and Layout of Parts .................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Disassembling and Reassembling Exterior Parts .................................. 6-3

6.3.1 COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV, COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT ..................................... 6-3
6.3.2 COVER(FU)-CV, COVER(FB)-CV, COVER(COVER-FU)-CV,
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV ...................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.3 COVER(PCB)-CV, COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV .............................................................. 6-5
6.3.4 COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV, COVER-Y-RAIL-CV54 .......................................................... 6-6
6.3.5 COVER(SIDE-L)-CV, COVER(SIDE-R)-CV ........................................................... 6-6
6.3.6 PANEL-ASSY-CV ................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.7 COVER(TOOL-BOX)-CV........................................................................................ 6-9
6.3.8 COVER(FRD)-CV................................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.9 COVER(INK-CART)-CV ....................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.10 COVER(R-L) ....................................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.11 COVER(PINCH-D) ...............................................................................................6-11
6.3.12 SWITCH(Interlock)-ASSY, SWITCH(COVER)-ASSY .......................................... 6-12
6.3.13 Photo sensor LG248NL1 ..................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.14 PCB-ASSY-MCP4 ............................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.15 CASE(CUTTER), SLIDER(CUTTER) .................................................................. 6-14
6.3.16 PAPER-GUIDE .................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4 Disassembling and Reassembling Y Driver ........................................ 6-16

6.4.1 Photo sensor LG248NL1 ...................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.2 Y-MOTOR-ASSY, PULLY(Y-MOTOR), Bearing FR188ZZ,
THERMISTOR(Y-MOTOR)-TX ............................................................................ 6-17
6.4.3 Driving Pulley Assy, Timing belt ............................................................................ 6-19
6.4.4 BELT(SUS) ........................................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.5 Following movement Pulley Assy ......................................................................... 6-23
6.4.6 ROLLER(PINCH) ................................................................................................. 6-24
6.4.7 T-FENCE .............................................................................................................. 6-25
6.4.8 CABLE (FFC3-ASSY, FFC4-ASSY, FFC5-ASSY, FFC6-ASSY) ........................... 6-27
6.4.9 Y-MOTOR FAN ASSY .......................................................................................... 6-48
6.5 Disassembling and Reassembling X Driver ........................................ 6-49

6.5.1 X-MOTOR-ASSY.................................................................................................. 6-49
1-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.5.2 SUCTION FAN ASSY ........................................................................................... 6-52

6.5.3 PCB-ASSY-SNS1 (Front side).............................................................................. 6-53
6.5.4 PCB-ASSY-SNS1 (Rear side) .............................................................................. 6-53
6.5.5 GRIT-UNIT ........................................................................................................... 6-54
6.6 Disassembling and Reassembling Controller Box ............................... 6-56

6.6.1 FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV................................................................................. 6-57
6.6.2 POWER SUPPLY ................................................................................................. 6-58
6.6.3 Printed Circuit Boards (PCB-ASSY-LEECV, PCB-ASSY-TRC-CV) ...................... 6-59
6.6.4 CABLE(HeaterSwitch)ASSY ................................................................................ 6-60
6.6.5 IC(EEPROM) ........................................................................................................ 6-61
6.7 Disassembling/Reassembling Head and Carriage .............................. 6-62

6.7.1 REPLACEMENT OF PRINT HEAD ...................................................................... 6-62
6.7.2 FFC(LED-HEAD) .................................................................................................. 6-75
6.7.3 PCB-ASSY-SNS1 ................................................................................................. 6-77
6.7.4 PCB-ASSY-LEC4 ................................................................................................. 6-78
6.7.5 HEAD-ALIGNMENT-ASSY-CV ............................................................................. 6-80
6.7.6 CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY ..................................................................................... 6-81
6.7.7 FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV................................................................................. 6-83
6.7.8 CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV)......................................................................... 6-84
6.7.9 HEAD-HEATER-ASSY ......................................................................................... 6-85
6.8 Disassembling and Reassembling WIPING-UNIT-CV ......................... 6-88

6.8.1 WIPING-UNIT-CV................................................................................................. 6-88
6.8.2 SWITCH(WIPE)-ASSY, HOLDER(WIPE-LEVER)-ASSY ..................................... 6-90
6.9 Disassembling and Reassembling CAPPING-UNIT-CV ...................... 6-91

6.9.1 CAPPING-UNIT-CV.............................................................................................. 6-91
6.9.2 VALVE-ASSY ....................................................................................................... 6-93
6.9.3 CAP_ASSY, JOINT(CAP Sa) ............................................................................... 6-94
6.9.4 MOTOR(CAPPING)-ASSY ................................................................................... 6-95
6.9.5 SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY, LEVER(CAP)-ASSY ......................................................... 6-95
6.9.6 MOTOR(CAP)ASSY ............................................................................................. 6-97
6.9.7 PUMP-F-ASSY-CV ............................................................................................... 6-97
6.9.8 SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSY ..................................................................................... 6-98
6.10 Disassembling and Reassembling Ink Cartridge Section ................... 6-99

6.10.1 PCB-ASSY-JUN1 ................................................................................................ 6-99
6.10.2 PCB-ASSY-B1 ................................................................................................... 6-100
6.10.3 FILTER-ASSY(PIN-TYPE)-LV3 ......................................................................... 6-103
6.10.4 SENSOR ........................................................................................................... 6-105
6.11 Disassembling and Reassembling Heater Section ........................... 6-106

6.11.1 PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY (with heater)
PAPER-GUIDE-FEED-CV54-UNIT (with heater) ............................................... 6-106
6.11.2 PAPER-GUIDE-FEEDING64-CV-ASSY ............................................................ 6-108
6.11.3 PLATEN64-CV-ASSY, PLATEN-CV54-UNIT ..................................................... 6-109
6.11.4 EDGEGUARDASSY(L)-CV, EDGEGUARDASSY(R)-CV ................................... 6-111
1-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.12 Disassembling and Reassembling TAKE UP REEL UNIT, FEEDING-UNIT

6-112
6.12.1 SUPPORT(T-ROLLER-R) Replacement Procedure ...........................................6-112
6.12.2 FLANGE(2-INCH)...............................................................................................6-113
6.12.3 MOTOR-UNIT ....................................................................................................6-114
6.12.4 CABLE(TU-Switch)-ASSY ..................................................................................6-115
6.12.5 TORQUE LIMITER .............................................................................................6-115
6.12.6 PHOTO-IC-ASSY ...............................................................................................6-117
6.12.7 IR-LED-ASSY .....................................................................................................6-118
6.12.8 SWITCH(RollEnd)-ASSY ...................................................................................6-119
6.13 BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY and REASSEMBLY ....................... 6-120

6.13.1 CAP-LOUVERb-FS Replacement Procedure .................................................... 6-120
6.13.2 BLOWER3-FS Replacement Procedure ........................................................... 6-120
6.13.3 FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) Replacement Procedure .............................................. 6-121
6.13.4 FAN(MEDIA COOL) ASSY HV Replacement Procedure ................................... 6-122
6.13.5 CABLE(MFAN-IF2)-ASSY(LV3) Replacement Procedure ................................. 6-123
SECTION 7 ADJUSTMENT 7-1

7.1 Height adjustment of CARRIAGE (BASEHEAD) ................................... 7-2
7.2 BELT(SUS)64/BELT-SUS-CV54 Tension Adjustment ............................ 7-5
7.3 Timing Belt (Y-MOTOR-ASSY Belt) Tension Adjustment ....................... 7-6
7.4 CAPPING-UNIT-CV Cam Position Adjustment...................................... 7-7
7.5 Correcting the Cap Position .................................................................. 7-8
7.6 Correcting Wiping Position.................................................................. 7-10
SECTION 8 OPERATION MECHANISM 8-15

8.1 Overview of System Operation Mechanism ........................................ 8-15
8.2 Media Feeding System ....................................................................... 8-16
8.3 Carriage System ................................................................................. 8-20
8.4 Ink System .......................................................................................... 8-22
8.5 Various Functions for Printing ............................................................. 8-26
8.6 Head driving principle ......................................................................... 8-30
8.7 Printing Mode ..................................................................................... 8-32
8.8 LEECV (Low End Engine CVS) Board ................................................ 8-33
8.8.1 Basic Structure ..................................................................................................... 8-33
8.8.2 Operation Mechanism of Engine Block ................................................................ 8-34
1-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.9 Engine Control Firmware .................................................................... 8-41

8.9.1 Function Block ...................................................................................................... 8-41
8.9.2 Operation Mechanism .......................................................................................... 8-41
8.10 Power Supply Unit ............................................................................. 8-42

8.10.1 Electrical Specifications ....................................................................................... 8-42
8.10.2 Connector Specifications ..................................................................................... 8-42
8.10.3 ON/OFF Sequence.............................................................................................. 8-43
8.10.4 Others ................................................................................................................. 8-44
8.11 Blower Unit Overview ......................................................................... 8-45
APPENDIX 1
APPENDIX A-1 IP-5620 Electrical connection diagram-1.......................... A-2
1-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
FIGURE
Figure 1.1 Maintenance workflow .............................................................................. 1-1
Figure 1.2 External view and part names (front) ........................................................ 1-4
Figure 1.3 External view and part names (rear) ......................................................... 1-5
Figure 1.4 Heater names and locations (sectional view) ............................................ 1-6
Figure 1.5 Operation panel ........................................................................................ 1-7
Figure 1.6 Maintenance space .................................................................................. 1-9
Figure 6.1 Name of each part of printer exterior ........................................................ 6-2
Figure 8.1 Overview of system operation mechanism ............................................. 8-15
Figure 8.2 Feeding system mechanism (X axis) ...................................................... 8-16
Figure 8.3 Feeding system mechanism (Y axis) ...................................................... 8-16
Figure 8.4 Overview of ink system structure ............................................................ 8-22
Figure 8.5 Conceptual diagram of ink system .......................................................... 8-22
Figure 8.6 Basic hardware configuration ................................................................. 8-33
Figure 8.7 USB/engine firmware function block diagram ......................................... 8-41
Figure 8.8 Power supply ON/OFF transition diagram .............................................. 8-43
Figure 8.9 Operation principle of blower unit ........................................................... 8-45
TABLE
Table 1-1 Tools and measuring instruments (1/2) .......................................................1-2
Table 1-1 Tools and measuring instruments (2/2) .......................................................1-3
1-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 1 OVERVIEW OF MAINTENANCE

WORKFLOW
This section describes workflow, necessary tools, external views, and part names for the
primary maintenance.
1.1 Maintenance Workflow
Maintenance of the printer is classified into regular maintenance and corrective maintenance in
accordance with the maintenance agreement.
The workflow for each maintenance is shown Figure1.1.
Start
Start
Periodic inspection/
Periodic When an error occurs Maintenance to cope
inspection with an error
Periodic inspection/
maintenance When an error occurs
Maintenance to cope
Check details of the problem and the
Periodic with an error
Check the status related to this device circumstances that existed when the
inspection problem occurred
(including problems and complaints)
maintenance
Check details of the problem and the
Check the status related to this device circumstances that existed when the
(including problems and complaints) problem occurred
Check and clean parts. Conduct troubleshooting
=> Section 2 - If a USB controller error is suspected
Replace parts if necessary => Section 5
=> Section 6 - If the error is a general failure or an
Or make adjustments image quality failure
=> Section 7 => Section 4
Check and clean parts. Conduct troubleshooting

=> Chapter 2 - If a USB controller error is suspected
Print to check
Replace parts whether the device works
if necessary Replace defective
=> Chapter 5 parts => Section 6
correctly.
=> Chapter 6 Make
- If theadjustments
error is a ifgeneral
necessary => or an
failure
Or make adjustments Section 7
image quality failure
Printing to check
=> Chapter 7 whether the device => Chapter 4
works correctly. End Replace abnormal parts => Chapter 6
Make
Make adjustments
sure that the ifproblem
necessary
has=>been
End Chapter 7
eliminated
Make sure that the problem has been

eliminated End
Figure 1.1 Maintenance workflow End
1-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1.2 Necessary Tools
The following table shows tools and measuring instruments necessary for maintenance.
Table 1-1 Tools and measuring instruments (1/2)
Name Quantity Remarks
Phillips screwdriver (2 bits) 1 Commercially available

Phillips screwdriver (1 bit) 1 For removing encoder, commercially available
Torque screwdriver (2 bits) 1 For mounting head unit (15kgf.cm),commercially
available
Stubby screwdriver (2 bits) 1 Commercially available
Flat-head screwdriver 1 For removing E-ring, commercially available
Flat-head precision screwdriver 1 For removing E-ring, commercially available
Hex key wrench set (3 types) 1 Commercially available
Pliers or long-nose pliers 1 For mounting E-ring, commercially available
Nipper 1 Commercially available
Multimeter 1 For measuring voltage, commercially available
Metal rule 1 For adjusting head unit (300 mm min.),
commercially available
Tube cutter 1 Commercially available
Cutter knife 1 Commercially available
Cable binder 1 Commercially available
Microscope with scale (M830-S or 1 Peak staff microscope 100x, No. 2008-100
equivalent) (Scale: standard)
Thermohygrometer 1 For checking environmental conditions,
commercially available
Grease for synchronous 1 EM-60L or equivalent (silicone grease possible
belt/deceleration belt instead)
CF card for rewriting engine F/W 1 Commercially available compact flash card
ROM (Type1)
- Capacity: 32MB, 64MB or 128MB
- Format: FAT16 or FAT32
Glove or fingerstall 1 set For protection from ink blot, commercially
available
Cleaning paper As required For wiping ink blot, Kimwipes or equivalent
1-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Table 1-1 Tools and measuring instruments (2/2)
Name Quantity Remarks
Fan-shaped tension gauge (0.1 to 20 N) 1 For X motor installation

Completely-reversed type
(Ohba keiki seisakusho)
Ethanol As For cleaning contacts, etc.
required
BeltTension-Jig 1 For adjusting SUS belt tension (push)
Round-type spring tension gauge 50 N 1 For adjusting Y motor belt tension (pull)
Thickness gauge 1 0.2 to 0.5mm
BLOCK-ADJUST-CR 4 - For adjusting height of carriage
- For adjusting parallelism of carriage
BAR-ADJUST-CR 2 Head positioning pin
Flat-head screwdriver (short) 1 －
Phillips screwdriver (long) 1 －
Cap Cleaning Liquid 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Wiper Cleaning Liquid 1 set Daily maintenance kit
(Use the liquid that matches the ink
used)
Cleaning swab 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Dropper 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Cleaning liquid cartridge 6 －
Storage liquid cartridge 6 －
SUS belt installation jig 1 －
Cartridge for head replacement 1 For head replacement
Screwdriver for head replacement 1 Recommended: No.1300 by VESSEL
Plastic grip screwdriver (+) 2x100
Screwdriver for head heater 1 Recommended: No.6100 by VESSEL
replacement Crystalline screwdriver (+) 1x100
1-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1.3 External Views and Part Names
Figures 1.2 and 1.3 show the external view and part names.
Front View
(8)
(1)
(6)
(12)
(10)
(10)
(5) (7)
(2)
(3)
(9)
(11)
(4)
(1) Operation panel Provided with lamps and LCD to indicate printer status, and keys
to set functions.
(2) Media outlet
(3) Pressure roller up/down lever Holds and releases media after it is inserted into the media inlet.
(4) Caster Locks to immobilize or unlocks to move the printer.
(5) Waste ink bottle
(6) Maintenance cover
(7) Cap cover
(8) Front cover
(9) Media cutter blade (option)
(10) Media clip
(11) Blower unit (option)
(12) Take-up reel unit (option)
Figure 1.2 External view and part names (front)
1-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Rear View
(13) (17)
(13)
(20)
(19) (14)
(18)
(21)
(15)
(16)
(13) Exhaust attachment attaching part

(14) Power inlet
(15) 100/200 V switch for heater unit
(16) USB connector
(17) Pressure roller up/down lever (Operates together with the pressure roller up/down lever on the front side.)
(18) Ink cartridge slot (The two slots on the right are closed with a plate in the 4-color specification
printer.)
(19) Flange holder
(20) Flange
(21) Caster
Figure 1.3 External view and part names (rear)
1-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Printer Heater Section

The printer is equipped with three heaters to fix ink on the print media and stabilize the print
quality.
Front Rear
Carriage
Print head
Media feed direction
Paper guide(rear)
Media
(22)
(24)
(23)
(22) Preheater Pre-heats the media

(23) Print heater Accelerates ink penetration into the media and fixes the ink.
(24) After heater Dries ink to stabilize the print quality
＊:These three heaters are controlled individually.
Figure 1.4 Heater names and locations (sectional view)
Note
Be careful about the hot
＊:These surfaces
3 heaters areofcontrolled
each heater.
individually.
1-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Operation Panel
The keys, LEDs and LCD are laid on the operation panel of the printer as shown below.
The buzzer is to notify the operator when an error occurs or an invalid key is pressed.
Figure 1.5 Operation panel
1-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Options
- Blower unit (option)

This unit dries ink by sending air to the media.
- Exhaust attachment (option)

A unit to install the exhaust air duct to the printer.
- 2 inch flange (option)

This flange is used to load the roll media of 2 inch core.
- Take-up reel unit (64) (option)

This unit is used to reel in the printed media. (For IP-5620)
- Take-up reel unit (54) (option)

This unit is used to reel in the printed media. (For IP-5520)
- Cutter unit (64) (option)

This unit is used to cut the printed media manually. (For IP-5620)
- Cutter unit (54) (option)

This unit is used to cut the printed media manually. (For IP-5520)
- 6 color change kit (option)

This kit is used to upgrade a 4 color specifications printer to 6 color specifications.
- Ink type change kit (option)

This kit is used when changing the type of ink used by the printer.
1-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1.4 Maintenance Space
Figure 1.6 shows space required for the printer maintenance.
(Front side)
Height direction: 1750

(Unit: mm)
Figure 1.6 Maintenance space
1-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 2 INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE
This section describes specific maintenance operations.

For general inspection and maintenance operations, see Maintenance and
Adjustment/Replacement section in the User's Guide.
2-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2.1 Changing the Number of Ink Colors
2.1.1 Colors Number Change Procedure (4 colors to 6 colors)

The number of colors can be changed from 4 colors to 6 colors after the printer's installation.
* To change the printer to 6 color specifications, the 6 color change kit (option) is required.
The following shows the procedure to change the number of colors.
1. Execute RESEAT PRINTHEAD.

In PH.MAIN, execute #RESEAT PRINTHEAD to move the carriage to the maintenance
area.
2. Open the front cover.

Ignore the following message that appears on the panel.
CHECK PRINTHEAD
CLOSE COVER
3. Close CP_Manager if you are using it.
4. Press the POWER switch to turn the printer off.

* The carriage does not move since the front cover is open.
5. Remove the blindfold board from the ink box.
6. Replace the six caps and the six pumps.
7. Remove the tape stuck on the FFC cables and heater cables for Lm and Lc.
8. Remove the two blindfold boards from the carriage and install the Lm and Lc print heads.
9. Install the ink cartridges for Lm and Lc.
10. Close the front cover.

* The steps 5 to 10 must be performed with the printer turned off.
11. Start the printer in language setting mode and set 6 COLORS in No. OF INK COLORS.
12. Start CP_Manager if you use it.
2-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
13. Enter the print head information for Lm and Lc print heads (maintenance mode).
Under #PRINT HEAD INFO in PH.INF, select Lm and Lc and enter the following items.
(1) Serial number

(2) Voltage rank A
(3) Voltage rank B
14. Execute CHARGE INK SYS.

Under #INK SYSTEM OPT in PH.MAIN, execute CHARGE INK SYS to charge the ink.
15. Perform the different adjustments.

Perform the different adjustments referring to Section 5 Nozzle Position Adjustment,
Section 6 Head Adjustment and Section 8 Bidirectional Adjustment in the
Installation Manual.
(The color number change procedure is complete)
2.1.2 Color Number Setting Change Procedure

The following shows the procedures to change the ink color number setting when an
incorrect setting has been made at the time of installation.
(1) 6 colors to 4 colors

The procedure to change the ink color number setting to 4 colors when it was incorrectly
set to 6 colors at the time of installation is shown below.
*It is assumed that 4 ink cartridges (Y, M, C, K) are installed in the printer.
If the ink color number is set to 6 colors with only 4 ink cartridges installed in the printer,
the following message is displayed during the printer initialization following the setting.
INSTALL
Lm INK CARTRIDGE
Perform the following procedure to change the setting.
1. With the error message displayed, press the POWER switch on the operation panel to
turn the printer off.
2-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3. After all the items in the language setting mode have been set, the printer starts
initialization and displays the following message.
OPEN COVER
INSTALL WIPER LIQUID
4. Following the guidance, charge the wiper cleaning liquid and install the print heads in the
same way as the normal print head installation procedure.
5. Start CP_Manager when the printer enters the online state (if using CP_Manager).

(The 6 colors to 4 colors change procedure is complete)
(2) 4 colors to 6 colors

The procedure to change the ink color number setting to 6 colors when it was incorrectly
set to 4 colors at the time of installation is shown below.
* It is assumed that 6 print heads (Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc) and 6 ink cartridges (Y, M, C, K, Lm,
Lc) are installed in the printer.
When 6 print heads and 6 ink cartridges (Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc) are installed in the printer, if
ink color number is set to 4 colors, the printer operates in 4 color mode and no error
message is displayed. In this case, perform the following procedure to change the setting.
1. Install the 6 print heads following the head installation guidance.

However, the head information input guidance is displayed for 4 colors (Y, M, C, K) only.
* Even if you notice the setting error before the head installation guidance is displayed,
install the 6 print heads following the guidance.
2. Press the CANCEL key (to cancel the ink charge operation) when the following message
appears on the panel.
INK FILL
*OK?
3. Press the OK key when the following message appears on the panel.
CANCEL INK FILL

*OK?
2-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4. Wait until the printer enters online state, then press the POWER switch to turn the printer
off.
6. Start CP_Manager when the printer enters the online state (if using CP_Manager).
7. Enter the print head information for Lm and Lc print heads (maintenance mode).
Under #PRINT HEAD INFO in PH.INF, select Lm and Lc and enter the following items.
(1) Serial number

(2) Voltage rank A
(3) Voltage rank B
8. Execute CHARGE INK SYS.

Under #INK SYSTEM OPT in PH.MAIN, execute CHARGE INK SYS to charge the ink.

(The 4 colors to 6 colors change procedure is complete)
2-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2.2 Procedure to Replace Printer's Ink between EG-Outdoor GX

and EG-Outdoor IX
2.2.1 Changing between GX ink and IX ink

The following describes the procedure to replace your Printer's ink from:
- EG-Outdoor EX to EG-Outdoor IX; and
- EG-Outdoor IX to EG-Outdoor GX
In this section, the ink cartridges already installed that will be replaced are called current ink
cartridges, and the ink cartridges installed after replacement are called new ink cartridges.
Notes
- The replacement procedure takes 60 - 90 minutes.
- Do not suspend the procedure before the all procedure is completed.
- Before the procedure, install a media to the Printer.
- To check your Printer's status, print a nozzle check pattern before the replacement
procedure. The pattern enables you to compare the Printer's status after the ink
replacement with the previous one.
- Before starting ink replacement, lay the waste cloth on the floor so that you can put the
smeared wiper sponge on it.
Items required for ink replacement
Before the replacement, confirm that the items below were all prepared.
(1) Six new ink cartridges (one for each color)
(2) One wiper sponge
(3) One wiper cleaning liquid set exclusively supplied for the new ink
(4) One cleaning roller
(5) Two disposal gloves (to prevent ink smearing)
(6) One waste ink bottle exclusively supplied for the new ink
(7) Waste cloth
The items above are required to prime the ink system twice. First a new ink is charged
and removed so that the previous ink is eliminated completely. Then the new ink is
charged again.This operation stabilizes the new ink's print performance.
2-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Ink replacement workflow
STEP 1 To change the ink type setting.

✔
(1) Turn off the Printer power.
(2) Remove the current ink cartridges.
(3) Turn on the Printer power.
(4) With the Printer's operation panel, change the ink type
setting.
(5) Install the new ink cartridges.
STEP 2 To purge and charge ink.

✔
(1) Purge the previous inks, which requires approx. 3
minutes.
(2) Replace the wiper sponge with a new one.
(3) Replace the current wiper cleaning liquid with a new
one exclusively supplied for the new ink.
(4) Replace the current waste ink bottle with a new one
exclusively supplied for the new ink.
(5) Clean the Capping unit.
(6) With a new ink prime the ink system, which requires
approx. 15 minutes.
(7) Purge the new ink, which requires approx. 3 minutes.
(8) Empty the waste ink bottle.
(9) Again prime the ink system with the new ink, which
requires approx. 15 minutes.
STEP 3 To confirm the print performance after ink replacement.

✔
(1) Print a nozzle check pattern.
(2) Adjust the bidirectional print position.
2-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
STEP 1 To change the ink type setting. Operation panel
To turn off the printer power, keep the

key pressed and press the power
switch for 2 seconds on the operation panel.
Power switch
Remove the six ink cartridges from the

Printer.
Turn on the power switch on the operation

panel.
(4) With the Printer's operation panel, change the ink type setting.
1. The error message is displayed on the INSTALL

operation panel.
Y INK CARTRIDGE
2. Set the printer to offline. (Press ↑INK MEDIA REG↓

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→
3. Enter the maintenance mode. ↑PRINTER SETUP↓

See 3.2 Maintenance Modefor details
on how to enter the maintenance ←ADJUST HEATER→
mode.
4. Press key twice to display ↑PRINTER SETUP↓

the SETUP MENU.
←ADJUST HEATER→
2-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Press key to enter the SETUP >LANGUAGE

MENU.
#JAPANESE
6. Press key four times to display #INK TYPES

#INK TYPES.
>GX
7. Press key to enter the mode to #INK TYPES

change the ink type.
*GX
8. Select the type of the new ink with #INK TYPES

and keys. *IX
9. Press key to confirm the new ink #INK TYPES

type setting.
>IX
1. Insert the new ink cartridges into the

slots so that each cartridge is set in its
color's slot.
Insert each ink cartridge as far as it

goes.
The ink cartridge position differs
depending on the color. Do not forcibly
insert the ink cartridge in the wrong
slot.
2. With the panel indication confirm that PRINTER READY

the Printer returned to the online state.
ROLL:1625/PAPER
Notes
The error message is displayed when
the ink type was not setup correctly. In CHECK 4
such a case, start all over again from XX INK CARTRIDGE
2-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(1) Purge the previous ink.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→
2. Press key to display

↑REWIND FORM FEED↓
PH.MAIN MENU.
←PH.REC PH.MAIN→
3. Press key to enter in PH.MAIN

#CAP CLEANING
MENU. Then, the cap cleaning menu
is displayed. >
4. Select #INK SYSTEM OPT with #INK SYSTEM OPT

key and press key. >STORE INK SYS
5. Select *PURGE INK with key. #INK SYSTEM OPT

*PURGE INK
6. Check visually that the Waste ink

START PURGING
bottle is not full, and press key.
*BOTTLE OK ?
7. With the message PURGING

displayed, the ink purge starts.
PURGING
XXX
This operation takes approx. 3
minutes. XXX: The numeral is counted down every 10
seconds.
8. When the purge has finished, an error

message is displayed on the panel. INSTALL
Insert the ink cartridges in the slots for Y INK CARTRIDGE
each color.
9. The operation panel again indicates

the PH.MAIN MENU. #INK SYSTEM OPT
>STORE INK SYS
2-10
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2) Replace the wiper sponge with a new one.
1. Set the printer to offline and press ↑REWIND FORM FEED↓

key to display PH.MAIN
MENU. ←PH.REC PH.MAIN→

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >
3. Select #REPLACE WIPE SPONGE #REPLACE WIPE SPONGE

with key and press key.
>
4. When the confirmation menu appears,

#REPLACE WIPE SPONGE
press key.
*OK ?
5. Open the Front cover and the Cap OPEN COVER

cover.
REPLACE WIPE SPONGE
REPLACE WIPE SPONGE

CLOSE COVER
6. Raise up the Wiper cleaning liquid

bottle a little, and confirm that all liquid
has flowed into the printer.
Notes
Then check visually the Waste ink bottle
is not full, and remove the Wiper
cleaning liquid bottle.
2 - 11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Erect the Wiper sponge little by little

while drawing the Wiper sponge
toward you. After confirming that the
liquid in the Wiper sponge has flowed
in the printer completely, pull out the
Wiper sponge.
8. Install a new Wiper sponge exclusively

supplied for the new ink.
Insert it as far as it goes until it clicks.
9. Close the Cap cover and the Front #REPLACE FINISHED

cover.
*NO
10. Select *YES and press key to

#REPLACE FINISHED
finish the replacement.
*YES
Notes
The Printer automatically calculates the Wiper sponge's accumulated usage time, and
displays the message prompting the Wiper sponge replacement. When a new Wiper
sponge is installed and *YES is selected, the calculation so far is cancelled and a new time
calculation starts. Note that this accumulated time is not calculated correctly if the Wiper
sponge is not replaced properly.
(3) Replace the current wiper cleaning liquid with a new one exclusively supplied for the new ink.
1. Set the printer to offline and press ↑REWIND FORM FEED↓

key to display PH.MAIN
MENU. ←PH.REC PH.MAIN→

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >
2-12
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3. Select #REPLACE WIPE LIQUID with

#REPLACE WIPE LIQUID
key and press key.
>
4. When the confirmation menu appears,

#REPLACE WIPE LIQUID
press key.
*OK ?
OPEN COVER
REPLACE WIPE LIQUID
5. Open the Front cover and the Cap REPLACE WIPE LIQUID
cover.
CLOSE COVER
Printer set cap

6. Replace the cap of new Wiper cleaning
liquid bottle with a new printer set cap.
7. Set the Wiper cleaning liquid bottle in

the Printer, and push the printer set
cap stopper by pressing its top.
8. Close the Cap cover and the Front #REPLACE FINISHED

over.
*NO
9. Select * YES and press key to #REPLACE FINISHED

finish the replacement.
*YES
2-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Notes
- The Printer automatically calculates the Wiper cleaning liquid bottle's accumulated
usage time, and displays the message prompting the Wiper cleaning liquid bottle
replacement. When a new Wiper cleaning liquid bottle is installed and *YES is selected,
the calculation so far is cancelled and a new time calculation starts. Note that this
accumulated time is not calculated correctly if the Wiper cleaning liquid bottle is not
replaced properly.
- Normally Wiper cleaning liquid becomes darker in color according to its accumulated
usage time.
(4) Replace the current waste ink bottle with a new one exclusively supplied for the new ink.
1. Remove the current Waste ink bottle

from the waste ink pour-opening (tube)
by slightly tilting the bottle.
2. Cap the bottle and remove it from the

Printer.
3. Wipe out ink stains around the Waste

ink bottle position.
4. Install a new Waste ink bottle

2-14
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. The message is displayed to select the #BOTTLE EMPTY?

waste ink counter reset.
*NO
6. Select #BOTTLE EMPTY? * YES and #BOTTLE EMPTY?

press key. *YES
(5) Clean the Capping unit
1. Install the Cap cleaning stick to the

Cap cleaning roller.
2. The operation panel again indicates ↑REWIND FORM FEED↓

the PH.MAIN MENU.
3. Press key to enter in PH.MAIN #CAP CLEANING

MENU3. Then, the cap cleaning menu
is displayed. >
4. Press key. When the #CAP CLEANING

confirmation menu appears, press
>
key again.
The carriage moves.
#CAP CLEANING
*OK ?
When the carriage moves, the

warning beep sounds.
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
2-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Open the Front cover and then the

Cap cover.
OPEN COVER
CAP CLEANING
6. Dip the Cap cleaning roller in the Cap

cleaning liquid.
Notes
After cleaning the cap with Cap cleaning
roller, never dip the Cap cleaning roller in
the cap cleaning bottle, or the Cap
cleaning liquid will be contaminated.
7. By rolling the Cap cleaning roller, clean the cap's top surface.
1. First, roll the Cap cleaning roller on 6 caps at
the rightmost side, shuttling once each.
2. Next, roll the Cap cleaning roller on 6 caps at

the rightmost side, shuttling 30 times each.
Notes
The Cap cleaning liquid must be applied only to the cap. Be careful not to apply the liquid
to the other parts.
8. Close the Cap cover and the Front cover.

The carriage automatically returns to the original position.
Notes
- Do not expose the Print heads for a long time when taking it out of the Capping unit.
Finish working quickly and cap the Print heads.
- After cleaned, if the lost print still occurs, remove foreign objects and ink stains on the
cap with the Cleaning swab soaked with cap cleaning liquid while checking visually.
- Be sure to apply the Cap cleaning liquid exclusively supplied for the new ink.
2-16
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(6) With the new ink prime the ink system as a first ink charge.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >

5. Select #CHARGE INK SYS with #INK SYSTEM OPT

key.
*CHARGE INK SYS

START INK FILL
BOTTLE OK ?
7. With the message INK FILLING INK FILLING

displayed, the ink charge starts.
XXX
minutes. XXX : The numeral is counted down every 10
seconds.
8. The operation panel again indicates #INK SYSTEM OPT

the PH.MAIN MENU.
>STORE INK SYS
9. Hold the Printer for 5 minutes or more.
2-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(7) Purge the new ink.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >


PURGE INK
6. Check visually that the Waste ink START PURGING

bottle is empty and press key. BOTTLE OK ?
7. With the message PURGING PURGING

XXX
seconds.
8. When the purge has finished, an error LOAD

message is displayed on the panel.
Insert the ink cartridges in the slots for Y INK
each color.

the PH.MAIN MENU.
>STORE INK SYS
2-18
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(8) Empty the Waste ink bottle.


Printer.

ink bottle.

5. The message is displayed to select the

#BOTTLE EMPTY?
*NO

press key.
*YES
2-19
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(9) Again prime the ink system with the new ink.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >

5. Select *CHARGE INK SYS with

#INK SYSTEM OPT
key.
CHARGE INK SYS

START INK FILL
BOTTLE OK ?
7. With the message INK FILLING

displayed, the ink charge starts. INK FILLING
XXX
minutes. XXX : The numeral is counted down every
10 seconds.

>STORE INK SYS
2-20
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

ADJUST MENU.
←ADJUST HEATER→
3. Press key to display the

#NOZZLE PRINT. #NOZZLE PRINT
#EXECUTE >
4. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
#EXECUTE >
5. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
#EXECUTE >*OK?
6. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
*EXECUTING
7. Press key. Then, after the print

head warming-up, the adjustment
pattern shown in the following page is
printed.
2-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
- Print sample Nozzle print
Confirm that all nozzles are operating correctly.

If missing dots or bent lines are found with nozzle print, perform a Normal head cleaning.
2-22
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→
2. Press key to enter M.ADV

#SING. ADV
MENU.
#EXECUTE>
3. Press key to select AUTO BIDIR

#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST
ADJUST and press key.
#EXECUTE>
4. Press key. The adjustment

pattern shown in the figure below is #AUTO BIDIR ADJUST
printed. *EXECUTING
- AUTO BIDIR ADJUST print sample
Media advance direction
2-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. After selecting M.ADV MENU, press #AUTO BIDIR ADJUST

key to display AUTO BIDIR
#EXECUTE>
ADJUST.
6. Press key to move the cursor

#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST
and and keys to select ADJ #ADJ L M>+0
R or ADJ L.
This is an example of the M (magenta)

color print head adjustment.
7. Press key to confirm the head

color to be corrected and make it ready #AUTO BIDIR ADJUST
for entering the parameter. #ADJ L M*+00
8. In the AUTO BIDIR ADJUST pattern, enter the number of the pattern where the two lines
of each color print head are aligned in one.
Select the digit with , keys and change the value with , keys.
Enter the number of the pattern where the two

lines are the closest.
For example, when setting the M color print
head, in -12 in the figure to the right, the two
lines are separated and in -8 the two lines are
aligned. So -8 is the correct value.
#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST

#M:ADJ L M >-08
9. Press key. #AUTO BIDIR ADJUST

#M:ADJ L M >-08
10. Adjust ADJ R using the same method.
11. Adjust other colors using the same method.
2-24
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2.2.2 Changing between GX ink and neon ink

(1) Change from GX ink to neon ink
- GX to neon
Notes
(4) Waste cloth
(5) Cleaning liquid cartridge set (for GX) 1 set
During this procedure, the ink circuit and print heads are cleaned twice with cleaning
liquid to ensure a constant print quality. The old ink is cleaned from the circuit before the
new ink is used.
2-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

✔
setting.
(5) Install the cleaning liquid cartridges.

✔
(1) Purge the old ink and clean the print heads.
(approx. 30 min.).
(4) Charge the new ink (approx. 15 min.).

✔
2-26
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Power switch

Printer.

panel.

operation panel.
Y INK CARTRIDGE

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

mode.

the SETUP MENU.
←ADJUST HEATER→
2-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

MENU.
#JAPANESE

#INK TYPES.
>GX

*GX
8. Select NEON (neon ink) with and #INK TYPES

keys. * NEON

type setting.
> NEON
(5) Install the cleaning liquid cartridges.
1. Insert the cleaning liquid cartridge in

the slot for each color.
Insert the cartridges completely.

Cleaning liquid is not differentiated by
color, so it does not matter in which
slot the cartridges are inserted.

ROLL:1625/PAPER
Notes
2-28
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(1) Purge the old ink and clean the print heads.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >

5. Press key to display *CLEAN #INK SYSTEM OPT

INK SYS, and then press key.. *CLEAN INK SYS

#INK SYSTEM OPT
*BOTTLE OK ?
7. Follow the guidance messages to

clean the print heads.
REMOVE CARTRIDGES
Print head cleaning is performed

(approx. 30 min.).
8. An error message is displayed on the

panel. INSTALL
Y INK CARTRIDGE
2-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

color's slot.

goes.
slot.
2. Return to the INK SYSTEM OPT #INK SYSTEM OPT

menu.
>STORE INK SYS
Notes
2-30
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL


the PH.MAIN MENU.

is displayed. >

>
key again.
The carriage moves.
#CAP CLEANING
*OK ?

CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT

Cap cover.
OPEN COVER
CAP CLEANING
2-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

cleaning liquid.
Notes

Notes
to the other parts.

Notes
2-32
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(4) Charge the new ink

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >


key.
*CHARGE INK SYS

START INK FILL
BOTTLE OK ?

XXX
seconds.

the PH.MAIN MENU.
>STORE INK SYS
2-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

ADJUST MENU.
←ADJUST HEATER→

#EXECUTE >
4. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
#EXECUTE >
5. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
#EXECUTE >*OK?
6. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
*EXECUTING

printed.
2-34
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

2-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

#SING. ADV
MENU.
#EXECUTE>

#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST
#EXECUTE>

printed. *EXECUTING
2-36
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

#EXECUTE>
ADJUST.

#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST
R or ADJ L.



#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST

#M:ADJ L M >-08

#M:ADJ L M >-08
2-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2) Change from neon ink to GX ink

- neon to GX
Notes
(4) Waste cloth
The items above are required to prime the ink system twice. First a new ink is charged
and removed so that the previous ink is eliminated completely. Then the new ink is
charged again.This operation stabilizes the new ink's print performance.
2-38
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

✔
setting.

✔
(1) Purge the previous inks, which requires approx. 3
minutes.
(3) With a new ink prime the ink system, which requires
approx. 15 minutes.
(4) Purge the new ink, which requires approx. 3 minutes.
(5) Empty the waste ink bottle.
(6) Again prime the ink system with the new ink, which
requires approx. 15 minutes.

✔
2-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

Power switch

Printer.

panel.

operation panel.
Y INK CARTRIDGE

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

mode.

the SETUP MENU.
←ADJUST HEATER→
2-40
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

MENU.
#JAPANESE

#INK TYPES.
>NEON

* NEON
8. Select the type of the new ink with #INK TYPES

and keys. * GX

type setting.
> GX

color's slot.

goes.
slot.

ROLL:1625/PAPER
Notes
2-41
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(1) Purge the previous ink.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >


*PURGE INK

START PURGING
*BOTTLE OK ?
7. With the message PURGING

PURGING
XXX
minutes. XXX: The numeral is counted down every 10
seconds.
8. When the purge has finished, an error

message is displayed on the panel. LOAD
Insert the ink cartridges in the slots for Y INK
each color.

>STORE INK SYS
2-42
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL


the PH.MAIN MENU.

is displayed. >

>
key again.
The carriage moves.
#CAP CLEANING
*OK ?

CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT

Cap cover.
OPEN COVER
CAP CLEANING
2-43
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

cleaning liquid.
Notes

Notes
to the other parts.

Notes
2-44
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3) With the new ink prime the ink system as a first ink charge.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >


key.
*CHARGE INK SYS

START INK FILL
BOTTLE OK ?

XXX
seconds.

the PH.MAIN MENU.
>STORE INK SYS
2-45
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(4) Purge the new ink.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >


PURGE INK
6. Check visually that the Waste ink START PURGING

bottle is empty and press key. BOTTLE OK ?
7. With the message PURGING PURGING

XXX
seconds.
8. When the purge has finished, an error INSTALL

message is displayed on the panel.
Insert the ink cartridges in the slots for Y INK CARTRIDGE
each color.

the PH.MAIN MENU.
>STORE INK SYS
2-46
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(5) Empty the Waste ink bottle.


Printer.

ink bottle.

5. The message is displayed to select the

#BOTTLE EMPTY?
*NO

press key.
*YES
2-47
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(6) Again prime the ink system with the new ink.

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

PH.MAIN MENU.

#CAP CLEANING
is displayed. >

5. Select *CHARGE INK SYS with

#INK SYSTEM OPT
key.
CHARGE INK SYS

bottle is not full, and press START INK FILL
key. BOTTLE OK ?

XXX
minutes. XXX : The numeral is counted down every
10 seconds.

>STORE INK SYS
2-48
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

ADJUST MENU.
←ADJUST HEATER→

#EXECUTE >
4. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
#EXECUTE >
5. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
#EXECUTE >*OK?
6. Press key.
#NOZZLE PRINT
*EXECUTING

printed.
2-49
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

2-50
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

key.)
←MEDIA M.ADV→

#SING. ADV
MENU.
#EXECUTE>

#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST
#EXECUTE>

printed. *EXECUTING
2-51
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

#EXECUTE>
ADJUST.

#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST
R or ADJ L.



#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST

#M:ADJ L M >-08

#M:ADJ L M >-08
2-52
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2.2.3 Change between IX ink and neon ink

(1) To change from IX ink to neon ink, execute the 2 procedures below in order.
(2) To change from neon ink to IX ink, execute the 2 procedures below in order.
2-53
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2.3 Changing to the Take-up Reel Unit with Rear Sensor
The take-up reel unit can be changed from the type without rear sensor to the type with rear
sensor by installing the SLACK MEDIA SENSOR UNIT.CV (U00128680700, referred to as the
sensor kit below).
To use the take-up reel unit with rear sensor, the firmware must be upgraded to the version
2.50 or higher and the setup settings must be changed.
Note
Check that the firmware version 2.50 or higher is installed before changing the take-up reel
unit.
Type without rear sensor Type with rear sensor
2.3.1 New type (with rear sensor) part list

The sensor kit contains the following parts.
Sensor fixture ×1
Front sensor plate リアセンサー板

Rear sensor plate×1
×1
Cable clamp ×1
Sensor cable Positioning tape ×1
2-54
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2.3.2 Removing the previous type (without rear sensor)
<Disassembly>
1. Remove the sensor cable and the

PHOTO-IC-ASSY.
a. Disconnect the two sensor connectors

shown in the figure.
b. Remove the PHOTO-IC-ASSY from the

Plate (right)
plate (right) with two screws.
Note
The two screws securing the PHOTO-IC-ASSY
PHOTO-IC-ASSY will be reused after to
install the front sensor plate, so be
careful not to lose them.
c. Remove the two cable clamps securing

Clamp
the sensor cable.
d. Go to the rear side of the printer and

remove the sensor cable from the rear of
the drive side on the take-up reel unit.
2-55
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2. Remove the IR-LED-ASSY with one Stand foot (right)

screw from the printer stand.
IR-LED-ASSY
3. Remove the two screws on the

IR-LED-ASSY and remove the sensor.
4. Install the sensor removed above to

the rear sensor plate.
5. Install the rear sensor plate to the

stand beam.
Install the sensor fixture at 706 mm (±1
mm) from the stand post on the cap
side.
Stand post
a. Stick the positioning tape.
Stick from here
Determine the installation position of
the sensor fixture using the positioning Positioning tape
tape (adhesive tape of 706 mm long).
Stick the positioning tape starting from Stand beam
the stand post on the cap side onto the
rear edge of the stand beam. Make sure
that the tape is stuck parallel to the rear
edge of the stand beam.
Note
To prevent the positioning tape from
coming unstuck, clean the stand beam
before sticking the tape with a cloth
moisten with alcohol or neutral detergent,
and let it dry thoroughly.
2-56
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
b. Place the sensor fixture at the other end

of the positioning tape. Sensor fixture
Positioning tape
c. Fix the rear sensor plate to the sensor

fixture installed in b. using one screw.
Hook the sensor

fixture's claws.
6. Attach the front sensor plate to the

plate (right) using two screws.
Plate (right)
Front sensor plate
2-57
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Connect the sensor cable.
a. Connect the sensor cable connector

(5-pin) from the rear of the take-up
reel unit drive side.
b. Connect the sensor cable connector

(3-pin) to the rear sensor's connector.
c. Secure the sensor cable with the 4-pin

connector using the cable clamp on
the plate (right).
d. Connect the 4-pin connector to the

front sensor and secure it with the
cable clamp.
Note
Pass the sensor cable under the side
plate.
Pass the sensor cable

under the side plate.
2-58
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2.3.3 Checking and setting the firmware version
1. Check that the firmware is version 2.50 or higher.

If the version is below 2.50, upgrade the firmware to version 2.50 or higher.
2. Set TUR UNIT in the SETUP menu
a. Turn on the power switch on the operation panel.
b. After the starting sequence operation has finished, PRINTER READY is displayed on the
panel. Enter the SETUP menu and set TUR UNIT to W/ REAR SENSOR.
* In case you are installing the printer, perform the following settings when PRINTER READY
is displayed after the ink charge has finished.
（1）SETUP – TUR UNIT (Displayed in maintenance mode only)
#TUR UNIT
>W/O REAR SENSOR
Press key to be able to change the setting.
#TUR UNIT
*W/O REAR SENSOR
W/O REAR SENSOR: previous take-up reel unit type

W/ REAR SENSOR: new take-up reel unit type
Change the setting to W/ REAR SENSOR using the and keys.
#TUR UNIT
*W/ REAR SENSOR
Press key to confirm the setting.
#TUR UNIT
>W/ REAR SENSOR
2-59
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 3 Operations and Functions of Maintenance Mode Menus
SECTION 3 OPERATIONS AND FUNCTIONS OF

MAINTENANCE MODE MENU
3.1 Introduction
Operation panel functions of the printer are classified as follows:

- User mode: Operation panel functions used by standard users
- Maintenance mode: Operation panel functions used for factory adjustments and field
maintenance
This section only describes operations of the maintenance mode used for factory adjustments
and field maintenance.
For operations of the user mode for standard users, refer to the User's Guide.
3-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.2 Maintenance Mode
Put the printer into the password entry state from the offline state in the user mode by the
following key operation, and then enter the password.
Push , , , and keys in this order.
(The buzzer for invalid key operation sounds when key is pressed, but the printer
goes to the password entry state.)
MAINTENANCE MODE
PASSWORD?
The password depends on the operator as follows:
Operator Password
Customer engineer
(primary) Push , , , and keys in this order.
Customer engineer (primary) can operate menus necessary for maintenance in the field (such
as nozzle check, monitoring, and head information).
3-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.3 Basic Menu Operation
When key is pressed in the online idle mode, the printer enters the offline mode, and
the menu group appears on the LCD allowing menu operations.
<First layer menu (Maintenance mode)>
INK MEDIA REG 

MEDIA M.ADJ
REWIND FROM FEED

PH.REC PH.MAIN
PRINTER SETUP
ADJUST HEATER
MNFG-PRN SENSORS
VOLT MOTORS
COUNTER PH.INF
EJECT 
The menu is displayed after entering the password.
The menu is displayed after entering password.

<Hierarchical menu structure>
The menu has the following hierarchical structure:
<First layer menu>
- This is the menu group displayed first.
- Some menus have several sub-menus.
<Second layer menu>
This menu group is under the first layer.
<Third layer menu>
- This menu group is under the second layer.
- Parameter menus are displayed when there are no third layer menus.
<Parameter menu>
- Select a menu item or enter a value.
- There are four methods: selection, numeral input, character input, and execution.
3-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.3.1 Menu tree

The menu tree of maintenance mode contains various maintenance items in addition to the
user menu tree (first layer menus are also added).
The table below contains each item in the tree structure of the maintenance mode to show
clearly the difference from the user mode.
Screened item shows items that were added to the maintenance mode.
Menu items regarding Lm (light magenta), Lc (light cyan), Np (neon yellow), and
Lm (light magenta) are displayed only for 6 color specifications printers (they are not displayed
for 4 color printers).
First layer Third layer

Second layer menu Parameter
menu 1 menu
:INK Same as user mode

:MEDIA Same as user mode
:MEDIA REG Same as user mode
:M.ADJ #SINGLE FEED PATTERN EXECUTE Execution
PRINT MO. HIGH SPEED, NORMAL, HIGH
QUALITY, MAX QUALITY
SMART PA. LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH
ADJ VALUE 100% (numeral input)
#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST EXECUTE Execution
ADJ L Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L M 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L C 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L K 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L Ny 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R M 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R C 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R K 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Ny 0 (numeral input)
#MULTI FEED PATTERN EXECUTE Execution
PRINT MO. HIGH SPEED, NORMAL, HIGH
QUALITY, MAX QUALITY
SMART PA. LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH
ADJ VALUE 100% (numeral input)
#MANUAL BIDIR ADJUST EXECUTE Execution
ADJ L Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L M 0 (numeral input)
3-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
ADJ L C 0 (numeral input)

ADJ L K 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ L Ny 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R M 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R C 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R K 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ R Ny 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2L Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2L M 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2L C 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2L K 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2L Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2L Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2L Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2L Ny 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2R Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2R M 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2R C 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2R K 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2R Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2R Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2R Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 2R Ny 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3L Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3L M 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3L C 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3L K 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3L Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3L Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3L Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3L Ny 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3R Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3R M 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3R C 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3R K 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3R Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3R Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3R Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ 3R Ny 0 (numeral input)
#CHECK BIDIR EXECUTE Execution
PATTERN ADJ1, ADJ2, ADJ3
3-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

menu 2 menu
:REWIND Same as user mode

:PH.REC Same as user mode
:FORM FEED Same as user mode
:PH.MAIN #CAP CLEANING Execution
#INK SYSTEM OPT Selection
STORE INK SYS, CLEAN INK SYS
CHARGE INK SYS, CHARGE CAP CL
PURGE INK SYS , CHARGE NEW PH
#REPLACE WIPER BLADE Execution
#REPLACE WIPE LIQUID Execution
#REPLACE WIPE SPONGE Execution
#WASH PRINTHEADS Execution
#PH HEIGHT ADJ Execution
#REPLACE PRINTHEAD Execution
#RESEAT PRINTHEAD Execution
#INK CHARGE DONE Selection
NO, YES
#UNCAP CARRIAGE Execution
#CAP CARRIAGE Execution
3-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

menu 3 menu
:PRINTER #CONFIG PRINT Execution

#ERROR LOG PRINT Execution
#HISTORY PRINT Execution
:ADJUST #NOZZLE PRINT EXECUTE Execution
NOZZLE MAP 01 Y 0 (numeral input)
Setting can be 0 (numeral input)
made on 10 nozzles
for each print head.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ EXECUTE Execution
ADJ Y 0 (numeral input)
ADJ M 0 (numeral input)
ADJ C 0 (numeral input)
ADJ Lm 0 (numeral input)
ADJ Lc 0 (numeral input)
ADJ Np 0 (numeral input)
ADJ Ny 0 (numeral input)
#PRINT HEAD ADJUST EXECUTE Execution
POS ADJ Y 0 (numeral input)
POS ADJ M 0 (numeral input)
POS ADJ C 0 (numeral input)
POS ADJ Lm 0 (numeral input)
POS ADJ Lc 0 (numeral input)
POS ADJ Np 0 (numeral input)
POS ADJ Ny 0 (numeral input)
R/L ADJ Y 0 (numeral input)
R/L ADJ M 0 (numeral input)
R/L ADJ C 0 (numeral input)
R/L ADJ K 0 (numeral input)
R/L ADJ Lm 0 (numeral input)
R/L ADJ Lc 0 (numeral input)
R/L ADJ Np 0 (numeral input)
R/L ADJ Ny 0 (numeral input)
#SENSOR ADJUST EXECUTE Execution
TOP ADJ 0 (numeral input)
SIDE ADJ 0 (numeral input)
#TUR ADJ PRINT EXECUTE Execution
3-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
#CHECK PATTERN Selection

CHECK ADJ, CHECK SLANT,
CHECK PH REP, CHECK
NOZZLE
#PH OFFSET VOLTAGE Y Numeral input

M
C
K
Lm
Lc
Np
Ny
#CAP POS ADJUST Execution
#CAP POSITION Numeral input
-5.0 to +5.0 mm
#WIPE POSITION Numeral input
-5.0 to +5.0 mm
#CAP UP/DOWN POS Selection
#MOVE CARRIAGE Selection
HOME, WIPE, MAINTENANCE
:SETUP #LANGUAGE Selection
JAPANESE,ENGLISH,FRENCH,
ITALIAN,GERMAN,SPANISH,
PORTUGUESE
#TIME ZONE (GMT+) Numeral input
#LENGTH UNITS Selection
MILLIMETER, INCH
#TEMPERATURE UNITS Selection
CENTIGRADE, FAHRENHEIT
#INK TYPES Selection
GX, IX, NEON
#NO. OF INK COLORS Execution (displayed)
#TUR UNIT Selection
W/ REAR SENSOR,
W/O REAR SENSOR
#HEAD WARMING Selection
ON, OFF
#BEEP Selection
ON, OFF
#BOOT VERSION Execution (displayed)
#PRINTER FW VER Execution (displayed)
#MAIN PCA VER Execution (displayed)
#CARRIAGE PCA Execution (displayed)
#BTC VERSION Execution (displayed)
#ATG VERSION Execution (displayed)
#RSM VERSION Execution (displayed)
#PTG VERSION Execution (displayed)
#USB ADDRESS Execution (displayed)
#USB SPEED Execution (displayed)
#FACTORY DEFAULT Execution
3-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
#PRINTER FW UPGRADE Execution

#DOWNLOAD Execution
#DATE(YY/MM/DD) Numeral input
#SYSTEM TIME Numeral input
#SERIAL No. Character input
0 to 9, A to Z
#INIT EEPROM Execution
#SAVE CALIBS Execution
#RESTORE CALIBS Execution
#SAVE EEPROM Execution
#RESTORE EEPROM Execution
:HEATER #HEATER DELAY TIME Numeral input
#HEATER STANDBY TIME Selection
#HEATER STANDBY TEMP Numeral input
The unit depends on the system
temperature unit.
Centigrade:15 to 40,
Fahrenheit: 59 to 104
3-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

menu 4 menu
:MNFG-PRN #MNFG PATTERN 0 EXECUTE Execution

DIRECTION Selection
BI, UNI
Y Selection
M ON, -OFF
C
K
Lm
Lc
Np
Ny
MODE Selection
050310, 070410, 090510, 050210
DENSITY Selection
NORMAL, HIGH DENSITY
SMART PASS Selection
LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH
LENGTH Numeral input
1 to 99999
COUNT Numeral input
1 to 99
#MNFG PATTERN 1 Same as PATTERN 0
#MNFG PATTERN 2
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#MNFG PATTERN 4
#MNFG PATTERN 5
#MNFG PATTERN 6
#MNFG PATTERN 7
#MNFG PATTERN 8
#MNFG PATTERN 9
#MNFG PATTERN 10
#MNFG PATTERN 11
#MNFG PATTERN 12
:VOLT #VOLTAGE CHECK Selection
HIGH, LOW
3-10
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
:SENSORS #PRINTER SENSORS EDGE SENSOR Execution (displayed)

FRONT MEDIA Execution (displayed)
REAR MEDIA Execution (displayed)
HOME POSITION Execution (displayed)
CAP Execution (displayed)
WIPER BLADE Execution (displayed)
MEDIA LEVER Execution (displayed)
REAR COVER-L Execution (displayed)
REAR COVER-R Execution (displayed)
ME SENSOR Execution (displayed)
#INK SENSOR Y INK CART Execution (displayed)
M INK CART Execution (displayed)
C INK CART Execution (displayed)
K INK CART Execution (displayed)
Lm INK CART Execution (displayed)
Lc INK CART Execution (displayed)
Np INK CART Execution (displayed)
Ny INK CART Execution (displayed)
Y NK END Execution (displayed)
M INK END Execution (displayed)
C INK END Execution (displayed)
K INK END Execution (displayed)
Lm INK END Execution (displayed)
Lc INK END Execution (displayed)
Np INK END Execution (displayed)
Ny INK END Execution (displayed)
#BOTTLE PRESENT Execution (displayed)
#TUR SENSORS TUR SENSOR Execution (displayed)
BACKWARDS Execution (displayed)
FORWARDS Execution (displayed)
#TEMP SENSORS AMBIENT Execution (displayed)
Y PH Execution (displayed)
M PH Execution (displayed)
C PH Execution (displayed)
K PH Execution (displayed)
Lm PH Execution (displayed)
Lc PH Execution (displayed)
Np PH Execution (displayed)
Ny PH Execution (displayed)
Y HEAD DRIVE IC Execution (displayed)
M HEAD DRIVE IC Execution (displayed)
C HEAD DRIVE IC Execution (displayed)
K HEAD DRIVE IC Execution (displayed)
Lm HEAD DRIVE Execution (displayed)
IC
Lc HEAD DRIVE Execution (displayed)
IC
Np HEAD DRIVE Execution (displayed)
IC
Ny HEAD DRIVE Execution (displayed)
IC
MOTOR TEMP Execution (displayed)
3 - 11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
: MOTORS #MEDIA ADV MOTOR Selection

OFF, FORWARDS, BACKWARDS
#PUMP/WIPE MOTOR Selection
OFF, FORWARDS, BACKWARDS
#CAP STAT MOTOR Selection
CLOSE, HALF, OPEN
#SUCTION FAN 1 Selection
#SUCTION FAN 2 OFF, ON
#SUCTION FAN 3
#SUCTION FAN 4
#PH COOLING FAN Selection
OFF, ON
#TUR MOTOR Selection
OFF, ON
#Y MOTOR COOLING FAN Selection
OFF, ON
3-12
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

menu 5 menu
:COUNTER #MEDIA USED Numeral input

The unit is specified by SETUP
-LENGTH UNITS menu.
Millimeter:
Inch:
#RESET MEDIA USED Execution
#MEDIA USED 2 Numeral input
The unit is specified by SETUP
-LENGTH UNITS menu.
Millimeter
Inch
#TOTAL INK USED(ml) Y Numeral input
M xxxxxxxxxxml
C
K
Lm
Lc
Np
Ny
#RESET TOTAL INK Execution
3RDPARTY INK USED Y Execution (displayed)
M Execution (displayed)
C Execution (displayed)
K Execution (displayed)
Lm/ Np Execution (displayed)
Lc/ Ny Execution (displayed)
3RDPART INK DATE Y Execution (displayed)
M Execution (displayed)
C Execution (displayed)
K Execution (displayed)
Lm/ Np Execution (displayed)
Lc/ Ny Execution (displayed)
:ELECT #LEE Execution
#LEC Execution
#INK EEPROM Y Execution
M
C
K
Lm
Lc
Np
Ny
#VDD Execution
:PH.INF Y SERIAL Execution(displayed)
NUMBER
3-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
HEAD VOLTAGE Execution(displayed)

RANK A
HEAD VOLTAGE Execution(displayed)
RANK A
DOT COUNTER Execution(displayed)
JAM COUNT Execution(displayed)
M Same as Y Same as Y
C
K
Lm
Lc
Np
Ny
3-14
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4 Menu Operation
This section describes details of each menu operation.
Note
Temperature unit appearing in this section can be converted as follows:
Fahrenheit = (Celsius x 9/5) + 32 degrees
3.4.1 M.ADJ Menu

(1) CHECK BIDIR (displayed only in maintenance mode)
Select check bidirectional pattern (top layer menu) with and keys, and confirm with
key.
Then select and confirm items in lower layer menus.
#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION>
Select a pattern with and keys, and press to confirm the pattern to print.
#CHECK BIDIR
#PATTERN ＊ADJ1
ADJ1/ADJ2/ ADJ3
- ADJ1: Prints a check patter for high speed and normal mode.
- ADJ2: Prints a check patter for high quality mode.
- ADJ3: Prints a check patter for max quality mode.
Confirm the print pattern with key.
#CHECK BIDIR
#PATTERN ＊ADJ2
Select execution with and keys.
#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION>
3-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Press to display the print confirmation. Press again to start the printing.
#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION ＊OK?
Display during printing
#CHECK BIDIR
＊EXECUTING
3-16
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.2 PH.MAIN Menu

(1) INK SYSTEM OPT
Execute service (cleaning) operation.
#INK SYSTEM OPT

>STORE INK SYS
- STORE INK SYS : With the ink being loaded to the printer, the print head
and the ink circuit are cleaned using cleaning liquid
(hard-to-dry liquid). Then, storage liquid is charged to
make the printer ready to a long-term storage.
- CLEAN INK SYS : After the long-term storage after the service clean, in
order to make the device ready to operate, the head
and the ink circuit are cleaned using cleaning liquid
(powerful detergent).
- CHARGE INK SYS: : Select this parameter to charge ink in the printer.
- PURGE_INK_SYS : Select this parameter to remove ink from the printer.
- CHARGE_NEW_PH : Select this parameter to recharge ink in the printer
after a head is replaced (displayed in the maintenance
mode only).
<Re-charge ink＞
#INK SYSTEM OPT

>CHARGE NEW PH
START INK REFILL

*BOTTLE OK?
#INK SYSTEM OPT

*BOTTLE OK?
INK REFILLING
XXX
#INK SYSTEM OPT

>CHARGE NEW PH
3-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2) REPLACE PRINTHEAD (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

This menu is used to replace the print head.
Note
Be sure to replace the print head following the procedure explained in the
6.7.1 REPLACEMENT OF THE PRINT HEAD.
#REPLACE PRINTHEAD
>
Press key to confirm the execution.
#REPLACE PRINTHEAD
＊OK?
Change the print head color to replace.
#PRINT HEAD INFO ZZ: Print head (Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc, Np, Ny)
＊ZZ
Note
When setting the color of the print head to replace in PRINT HEAD SELECT, the currently
stored head serial number, voltage rank, dot counter, and jam counter are cleared. Be sure
to correctly enter the serial number and voltage rank of the new print head.
If you made a mistake when entering this information, you can change the setting in the
HEAD. INFO menu.
Enter the print head serial number.
#ZZ SERIAL NUMBER ZZ: Print head

xxxxxxxxxx: Serial No. (10 characters)
＊0000000000 Range: A to Z, 0 to 9
Enter the print head voltage rank (A).
XX.X: Print head voltage rank

#ZZ HEAD VOLTAGE RANK A
＊XX.XV
#INPUT VALUE CHECK

＊OK?
3-18
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Enter the print head voltage rank (B).
#ZZ HEAD VOLTAGE RANK B XX.X: Print head voltage rank
＊XX.XV
#INPUT VALUE CHECK

＊OK?
Press key and pull out the ink cartridge whose print head is to be replaced.
REMOVE INK CARTRIDGE
Install a print head replacement cartridge.
INSTALL PRINTHEAD
REPLACEMENT CART
REPLACE XX PRINTHEAD XX: Print head color
*OK?
The print head moves by pressing key.
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
XX: Print head color

OPEN COVER
REPLACE XX PRINTHEAD
Open the front cover and the maintenance cover.
CLOSE COVER
↓
Follow the steps 14 to 32 of the procedure explained in 6.7.1.
↓
3-19
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
↓
Pull out the print head replacement cartridge.
REMOVE PRINTHEAD
REPLACEMENT CART
↓
Install the ink cartridge.
RE-INSTALL CARTRIDGE
Make sure that the waste ink bottle is not full. Press key to start ink charge.
CHARGE NEW PH
*BOTTLE OK?
INK REFILLING XXX: The numeral is counted down every

10 seconds.
XXX
XXＸ : The numeral is counted down
every 10 seconds.
When ink charge is completed, the original display appears.
#REPLACE PRINTHEAD
>
3-20
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3) INK CHARGE DONE (displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Displays whether ink charge is completed or not.
This menu can also be used to change the state.
*INK CHARGE DONE

>NO
- NO : Ink has not been charged.

- YES : Ink has been charged.
(4) UNCAP CARRIAGE (displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Opens the capping unit.
#UNCAP CARRIAGE
>
#UNCAP CARRIAGE
*OK?
Press key again to start execution of this menu.
#UNCAP CARRIAGE
*EXECUTING
3-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(5) CAP CARRIAGE (displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Closes the capping unit.
#CAP CARRIAGE
>
Press key to execute this menu.
#CAP CARRIAGE
*OK?
Press key again to start execution of this menu.
#CAP CARRIAGE
*EXECUTING
3-22
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.3 PRINTER Menu

(1) CONFIG PRINT
Prints information on the printer and panel settings.
#CONFIG PRINT
>
Content of CONFIG PRINT

This function prints the following information:
- Ink information (remaining ink, ink manufacturing date, etc.)
- Media registration information (bidirectional adjustment value, feed adjustment value,
cleaning mode, etc.)
- System information (version, etc.)
- Adjustment information (head position adjustment value, cap position, etc.)
- Counter information
- Print head information
(2) CONFIG PRINT

Prints error log information stored in the printer
# ERROR LOG PRINT

>
Content of ERROR LOG PRINT

Error log of the engine is acquired when the engine status has changed due to occurrence of
an error or other reasons.
Up to 300 errors can be recorded in the error log.
Notes
- Date displayed in log is based on GMT (Greenwich mean time).
- Refer to the time zone (3.4.6: SETUP (2) TIME ZONE) for actual time.
3-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
<Print content>
1. DATE: Date of logging
2. TIME: Time of logging
3. STATUS: Engine status
No. Status
0100 Initializing
0201 Idling
0202 Printing
0203 Head cleaning
0204 Charging or removing ink
0205 Ink circuit cleaning
0300 Occurrence of error
0400 Recovering
0800 Firmware updating
0900 Shutting down
4. ERROR: Error type
ERROR Description
FATAL Unrecoverable errors

COR1 Print inhibiting errors
COR2 Print allowing errors
EXEC Operation execution guidance (service clean, etc.)
3-24
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. CODE: Error code
CODE Error CODE Error
1010 FPGA(ATG/RSM) loading error 1310 Cap sensor error

1011 FPGA(PTG) loading error 1401 After heater temperature error
1100 Flash ROM error 1402 Print heater temperature error
1101 ATG/RSM error 1403 Preheater temperature error
1102 FFC error 1411 After heater error (High temperature)
1103 TRC connection error 1412 Print heater error (High temperature)
1104 JUN connection error 1413 Preheater error (High temperature)
1105 PTG error 1431 After heater error (Target
temperature not reached)
1106 Power error 1432 Print heater error (Target temperature not
reached)
1107 Carriage I/F error 1433 Preheater error (Target
1108 USB error 1441 After heater error (No interruption)
1109 EEPROM error 1442 Print heater error (No interruption)
110A Band memory error 1443 Preheater error (No interruption)
110B Cap position correction value error 1501 Y Head thermistor error
1110 ATG block clear error 1502 M Head thermistor error
1120 Suction fan 1 error 1503 C Head thermistor error
1121 Suction fan 2 error 1504 K Head thermistor error
1122 Suction fan 3 error 1505 Lm/Np Head thermistor error
1123 Suction fan 4 error 1506 Lc/Ny Head thermistor error
1130 ATG DMA error 1600 Y Head heater error (High temperature)
1140 Flash I/O error 1601 M Head heater error (High temperature)
1150 Home position sensor error 1602 C Head heater error (High temperature)
1160 Wipe position sensor error 1603 K Head heater error (High temperature)
1170 Ambient thermistor error 1604 Lm/Np Head heater error (High temperature)
1180 Pump/wipe motor overcurrent error 1605 Lc/Ny Head heater error (High temperature)
1190 Y Head drive voltage error 1610 Y Head heater error (Target temperature not
reached)
1191 M Head drive voltage error 1611 M Head heater error (Target temperature not
reached)
1192 C Head drive voltage error 1612 C Head heater error (Target temperature not
reached)
1193 K Head drive voltage error 1613 K Head heater error (Target temperature not
reached)
1194 Lm/Np Head drive voltage error 1614 Lm/Np Head heater error (Target temperature not
reached)
1195 Lc/Ny Head drive voltage error 1615 Lc/Ny Head heater error (Target temperature not
reached)
11A0 EEPROM I/O error 2000 System error (logic error)
to 6000
11D0 Head cooling fan error 7010 Cover open
11E0 Long-time storage error 7020 Lever open
11F0 Y motor cooling fan error 7100 Media end
1200 Y Head drive IC temperature error 7110 Media size error
1201 M Head drive IC temperature error 7120 Skew
1202 C Head drive IC temperature error 7130 Media jam (media feed)
1203 K Head drive IC temperature error 7140 Media jam (carriage)
1204 Lm/Np Head drive IC temperature error 7150 Media jam (media set)
1205 Lc/Ny Head drive IC temperature error 7210 No head
1220 Edge sensor error 7211 Y Head not installed
1260 FFC 1 error 7212 M Head not installed
1261 FFC 2 error 7213 C Head not installed
1262 FFC 3 error 7214 K Head not installed
1263 FFC 4 error 7215 Lm/Np Head not installed
3-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
CODE Error CODE Error
7216 Lc/Ny Head not installed 8321 Y ink information error

7220 Head data error 8322 M ink information error
7221 Y Head data error 8323 C ink information error
7222 M Head data error 8324 K ink information error
7223 C Head data error 8325 Lm/Np ink information error
7224 K Head data error 8326 Lc/Ny ink information error
7225 Lm/Np Head data error 8330 Ink end
7226 Lc/Ny Head data error 8331 Y Ink end
7230 Head temperature error 8332 M Ink end
7231 Y Head temperature error 8333 C Ink end
7232 M Head temperature error 8334 K Ink end
7233 C Head temperature error 8335 Lm/Np Ink end
7234 K Head temperature error 8336 Lc/Ny Ink end
7235 Lm/Np Head temperature error 8340 Ink expired
7236 Lc/Ny Head temperature error 8341 Y Ink expired
7390 Ink not charged 8342 M Ink expired
8120 Skew 2 8343 C Ink expired
8200 Out of ambient temperature range 8344 K Ink expired
8230 Out of head temperature range 8345 Lm/Np Ink expired
8231 Y Out of head temperature range 8346 Lc/Ny Ink expired
8232 M Out of head temperature range 8410 No waste ink bottle
8233 C Out of head temperature range 8430 Waste ink bottle full
8234 K Out of head temperature range 9010 Ink charging
8235 Lm/Np Out of head temperature range 9020 Ink removing
8236 Lc/Ny Out of head temperature range 9030 Ink recharging
8310 No ink cartridge 9040 Service clean
8311 Y Ink cartridge not installed 9050 Head wash
8312 M Ink cartridge not installed 9060 Head installed
8313 C Ink cartridge not installed 9070 Head replaced
8314 K Ink cartridge not installed 9080 Head checked
8315 Lm/Np Ink cartridge not installed 9110 Wiper blade replaced
8316 Lc/Ny Ink cartridge not installed 9120 Wiper sponge replaced
8320 Ink information error 9130 Wiper WIPER CLEANING LIQUID replaced
6. WARNING: Warning information
Bit position Warning
00000001 Take-up reel unit

00000002 Ink near end
00000004 Daily maintenance failed
00000008 Head uncapped
00000040 Wiper blade must be replaced
00000080 Wiper sponge must be replaced
00000100 WIPER CLEANING LIQUID must be replaced
10000000 Cleaning not executed
7. DISTANCE (mm) : Print distance (unit: mm)

8. DISTANCE (inch) : Print distance (unit: inch)
3-26
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3) HISTORY PRINT

Prints the ink system cleaning data and the head replacement log saved in the printer.
#HISTORY PRINT
>
<Content of HISTORY PRINT>

History data with respect to ink cartridge use, head replacement, and maintenance is printed.
Notes
- Date displayed in log is based on GMT (Greenwich mean time).
- Refer to the time zone (3.4.6: SETUP (2) TIME ZONE) for actual time.
No. Type Explanation
1 STORE INK SYS Service clean

2 CLEAN INK SYS Print head wash
3 CHARGE INK SYS Ink initial filling
4 CAP CLEAN Cap clean
5 REPLACE BLADE Wiper blade replacement
6 OP_WASH PH Manual fill cap
7 ADJHEIGHT Print head height adjustment
8 OP_NORMAL Normal Cleaning (manual)
9 OP_SLIGHT Slight cleaning (manual)
10 OP_STRONG Strong cleaning (manual)
11 AT_WASH PH Auto fill cap
12 PR_NORMAL Normal cleaning (auto)
13 PR_SLIGHT Slight cleaning (auto)
14 PR_SPECIAL Special cleaning (auto)
15 BOOTING UP Boot up time
16 SHUTTING DOWN Power off time
17 PRINTHEAD JAM Media jam
18 REPLACE PH Head replacement
19 RECHARG Recharge ink
20 INSTALL PH Install print head
21 REPLACE SPONGE Wiper sponge replacement
22 REPLACE LIQUID Wiper cleaning liquid replacement
23 RESEAT PH Print head check
24 AT_SPITTING Auto spitting
31 REMOVE_INK Ink removing
33 CHANGE_GX Ink type (GX)
34 CHANGE_IX Ink type (IX)
37 CLEANING MODE OFF Cleaning mode off
3-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.4 NOZZLE POS ADJ Menu

Adjusts the print head nozzle position. Enter an adjustment value based on the print result of
NOZZLE POS ADJ. This adjustment is needed after replacing the print heads.
STEP 1 How to print the adjustment pattern NOZZLE POS ADJ
Press to set the printer to offline from the online idle state.
↑INK MEDIA REG↓

←MEDIA M.ADJ→
Press key twice to display ADJUST menu.
↑PRINTER SETUP↓
←ADJUST HEATER→
Press key to enter ADJUST menu.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ

#EXECUTE
Press key to select [NOZZLE POS ADJ] and press key.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ

#EXECUTE
Press key. An adjustment pattern like shown in the next page is printed.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ

#EXECUTING
3-28
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
NOZZLE POS ADJ print sample

Determine the nozzle adjustment value for the 5 colors based on the print result.
Note
The adjustment value is the number for which the K head line and the adjusted head line
form a straight line. The line does not need to be perfectly straight. Choose the value for
which the line is almost straight.
Enlarged view
In the figure above, -3 is the adjustment value for M.
3-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
STEP 2 How to enter the adjustment value
After selecting ADJUST menu, press key to display NOZZLE POS ADJ.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ

#EXECUTE
Press key to move the cursor and select the head color with , keys.
This is an example of the M (magenta) color print head adjustment with K color print head as a
reference.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ

#ADJ VALUE M >0
Press key to confirm the print head color to be adjusted and make it ready for entering the
parameter.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ

#ADJ VALUE M *0
In NOZZLE POS ADJ, enter the number of the most appropriate pattern.
Change the value with , keys.
See page 3-29 for the method to determine the adjustment value.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ

#ADJ VALUE M >0
Press key.
#NOZZLE POS ADJ

#ADJ VALUE M >0
Adjust other colors using the same method.
Note:
The input range for the adjustment value is -8 to +8. However, the adjustment values difference between
heads must not exceed 8. If values are input with a difference greater than 8, the setting returns to the
previous values. In the case there is no adequate value within the input range, select the value for which
the line is the most straight on the print result.
Exemplo:
Com AJ. Y definido para +4, valores de -4 a +8 podem ser inseridos para os valores de ajuste dos
outros cabeçotes.
Depois, se AJ. M for definido para +8, o intervalo de ajuste dos outros cabeçotes será de 0 a +8.
3-30
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.5 ADJUST Menu

(1) CHECK PATTERN (displayed only in maintenance mode)
Prints adjustment patterns to verify the results of mechanical and electrical adjustments.
Press key during printing to stop printing.
#CHECK PATTERN
>CHECK ADJ
- CHECK ADJ : Prints the nozzle position, head position and PH R/L check pattern.
(Displayed in the maintenance mode only.)
- CHECK SLANT : Prints the head tilt check pattern. (Displayed in the maintenance
mode only.)
- CHECK PH REP : Prints print head information. (Displayed in the maintenance
mode only.)
- CHECK NOZZLE : Prints the nozzle check pattern. (Displayed in the maintenance
mode only.)
Select a pattern and press key. A confirmation message appears.
#CHECK PATTERN
*OK?
The following message indicates that printing is in progress.
#CHECK PATTERN
*EXECUTING
If printing is canceled, the following message is displayed until the cancel operation finishes.
CANCELING
PLEASE WAIT
The following message is displayed until PH WARMING UP finishes.
#CHECK PATTERN
＊PH WARMING UP
3-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2) PH OFFSET VOLTAGE (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Enter an adjustment value for the head drive voltage.
Ink color display order: Y > M> C > K> Lm > Lc
XX : Ink color
#PH OFFSET VOLTAGE
>XX(L) >+0.0V
Voltage correction range: -3.0 to +3.0
(3) CAP POS ADJUST (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Moves the carriage to the cap position adjustment location.
#CAP POS ADJUST

>
Range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm
(4) CAP POSITION (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Enter an adjustment value for the capping unit position.
#CAP POSITION
>+0.0mm
(5) WIPE POSITION (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Enter an adjustment value for the wipe unit position.
#WIPE POSITION
>+0.0mm
3-32
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(6) CAP UP/DOWN POS (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Enter an adjustment value for the cap up/down position.
#CAP UP/DOWN POS

>+0
- -1
- +0
- +1
(7) MOVE CARRIAGE (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Moves the carriage.
#MOVE CARRIAGE
>HOME
- HOME : Detects the home position and moves the carriage

to that position.
- WIPE : Moves the carriage to the wipe position.
- MAINTENANCE AREA : Moves the carriage to the maintenance area.
3-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.6 SETUP Menu

(1) INK TYPES (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)
Set the ink type.
#INK TYPE GX : Sets the GX ink

IX : Sets the IX ink
>GX
*If the ink cartridges set in the printer do not match the setting, the ink replacement error
message appears.
(2) No. OF INK COLORS (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Confirm the number of ink colors.
#No. OF INK COLORS 6 COLORS : Sets 6 ink colors

4 COLORS : Sets 4 ink colors
>6 COLORS
(3) TUR UNIT (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Set the take-up reel unit type.
#TUR UNIT
W/ REAR SENSOR
W/ REAR SENSOR: Take-up reel unit type with rear sensor

W/O REAR SENSOR: Take-up reel unit type without rear sensor
* The take-up reel unit may not operate correctly if this setting does not match the type of the
take-up reel unit installed. Be sure to confirm the type of the take-up reel unit installed and
make the setting correctly.
(4) DATE(YY/MM/DD) (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Set the system date and time.
#DATE(YY/MM/DD)
>05/08/08
Range: 00/01/01 to 35/12/31
3-34
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(5) SYSTEM TIME (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Set the system time.
#SYSTEM TIME
>12:51
Range: 00:00 to 23:59
(6) SERIAL No. (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Set the serial number of the printer.
#SERIAL No. XXXXXXXX : 8 digits (0 to 9, A to Z)
>XXXXXXXX
(7) INIT EEPROM (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Initialize all parameters.
#INIT EEPROM
>
(8) SAVE CALIBS (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Save parameters in the factory default area.
#SAVE CALIBS
>
(9) RESTORE CALIBS (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Restore parameters from the factory default area.
#RESTORE CALIBS
>
Be sure to restart the printer after RESTORE CALIBS is performed.
(10) SAVE EEPROM (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Save parameters in the data backup area.
#SAVE EEPROM
>
3-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(11) RESTORE EEPROM (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

Restore parameters from the data backup area.
#RESTORE EEPROM
>
Be sure to restart the printer after RESTORE EEPROM is performed.
3-36
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.7 HEATER Menu

(1) HEATER STANDBY TEMP (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)
Specify the standby temperature.
Centigrade
#HEATER STANDBY TEMP

>XX °C
Fahrenheit
#HEATER STANDBY TEMP

>XX °C
Setting range
Centigrade :15 to 40
Fahrenheit :59 to 104
3-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.8 TEST PRINT (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

(1) PATTERN x
Prints test pattern n.
Scroll the pattern (upper line) with and keys, and select a pattern with key.
After the pattern is chosen, the menu in the lower line can be scrolled and confirmed.
Parameters in the third layer menu (direction, mode, etc.) are retained until the second layer
pattern is changed or the first layer menu is displayed.
The following display shows an unconfirmed pattern.
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#EXECUTE
Upper line:
- PATTERN 0 : Vertical stripes
- PATTERN 1 : Horizontal stripes
- PATTERN 2 : Checker
- PATTERN 3 : 1-dot mesh
- PATTERN 5 : Solid pattern
- PATTERN 6 : 1-dot checker
- PATTERN 9 : Gradation
- PATTERN 10 : Mesh + slant lines
- PATTERN 11 : Verification of feeding accuracy
Lower line:
- # EXECUTE : Prints a test pattern.
- # DIRECTION : Selects bi-direction or uni-direction print.
- # DENSITY : Selects the print density.
- # SMART PASS : Selects the smart pass.
- # Y/# M/# C/# K/#Lm/#Lc : Selects a print color.
- # MODE : Selects a print mode.
- # LENGTH : Specifies print length.
- # COUNT : Specifies print volume.
The following display shows a confirmed pattern.
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#EXECUTE>
3-38
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
When key is pressed, the execution confirmation message appears.
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#EXECUTE *OK?
Printing is in progress.
#MNFG PATTERN 0
*EXECUTING
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#>DIRECTION >UNI
- BI
- UNI (default)
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#>DENSITY >NORMAL
- NORMAL
- HIGH DENSITY
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#>SMART PASS >LOW
- LOW
- MEDIUM
- HIGH
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#Y >OFF
- ON
- OFF (default)
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#M >OFF
- ON
- OFF (default)
3-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#C >OFF
- ON
- OFF (default)
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#K >ON
- ON (default)
- OFF
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#Lm >OFF
- ON
- OFF (default)
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#Lc >OFF
- ON
- OFF (default)
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#MODE >050310
- 050310 : NORMAL (default)

- 070410 : HIGH QUALITY
- 090510 : MAX QUALITY
- 050210 : HIGH SPEED
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#LENGTH >00400mm
Range: 1 to 99999 (unit: mm only)
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#COUNT >01
Range: 1 to 99
3-40
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.9 VOLT (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

(1) VOLTAGE CHECK
#VOLTAGE CHECK
>HIGH
- HIGH
- LOW
3-41
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.10 SENSORS (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

(1) PRINTER SENSORS
Displays sensors status in real time. When a status changes, the buzzer sounds.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#EDGE SENSOR >
Select a printer sensor with key.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#EDGE SENSOR >
Scroll the display of sensors with and keys.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#ME SENSOR >
- EDGE SENSOR
- FRONT MEDIA
- REAR MEDIA
- HOME POSITION
- CAP
- WIPER BLADE
- MEDIA LEVER
- REAR COVER-L
- REAR COVER-R
- ME SENSOR
Confirm the selected sensor with key.

Display the sensor selection screen with key.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#EDGE SENSOR *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#FRONT MEDIA *0
3-42
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
#PRINTER SENSORS
#REAR MEDIA *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#HOME POSITION *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#CAP *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#WIPER BLADE *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#MEDIA LEVER *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#REAR COVER-L *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#REAR COVER-R *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#ME SENSOR *0
3-43
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2) INK SENSOR

Displays ink sensors status in real time. When a status changes, the buzzer sounds.
Menu for Lm (light magenta) and Lc (light cyan) are displayed only for 6 color printers. (Not
displayed for 4 color printers.)
#INK SENSOR
#Y INK CART *0
Select an ink sensor with key.
#INK SENSOR
#Y INK CART *0
#INK SENSOR
#Y INK CART *0
- #Y INK CART *0
- #M INK CART *0
- #C INK CART *0
- #K INK CART *0
- #Lm INK CART *0
- #Lc INK CART *0
- #Y INK END *0
- #M INK END *0
- #C INK END *0
- #K INK END *0
- #Lm INK END *0
- #Lc INK END *0
#INK SENSOR
#Y INK CART *0
3-44
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3) WASTE INK BOTTLE

Displays waste ink bottle sensor status in real time. When the status changes, the buzzer
sounds.
#BOTTLE
#PRESENT
Select a bottle sensor with key.
#BOTTLE
#PRESENT >
#BOTTLE
#PRESENT *0
(4) TUR SENSORS

Displays take-up reel unit sensors status in real time. When a sensor status changes, the
buzzer sounds.
#TUR SENSORS
#TUR SENSOR
Select a take-up reel unit sensor with key.
#TUR SENSORS
#TUR SENSOR >
#TUR SENSORS
#BACKWARDS>
- TUR SENSOR
- BACKWARDS Winding direction switch status (0: inward, 1: off, and outward)
- FORWARDS Winding direction switch status (0: outward, 1: off, and inward)
3-45
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
#TUR SENSORS
#TUR SENSOR *0
(5) TEMP SENSORS

Displays thermistors status in real time.
#TEMP SENSORS
#AMBIENT
- AMBIENT Ambient temperature

- Y PH Y Head temperature
- M PH M Head temperature
- C PH C Head temperature
- K PH K Head temperature
- Lm PH Lm Head temperature
- Lc PH Lc Head temperature
- Y HEAD DRIVE IC Y head drive IC temperature
- M HEAD DRIVE IC M head drive IC temperature
- C HEAD DRIVE IC C head drive IC temperature
- K HEAD DRIVE IC K head drive IC temperature
- Lm HEAD DRIVE IC Lm head drive IC temperature
- Lc HEAD DRIVE IC Lc head drive IC temperature
Press key to allow selection of thermistors.
#TEMP SENSORS
#AMBIENT >
Scroll the display of thermistors with and keys.
#TEMP SENSORS
#Y PH >
Select a thermistor with key.
#TEMP SENSORS #TEMP SENSORS

#Y PH * XX.X °C #Y PH * XXX.X °F
The temperature is displayed in the unit specified by TEMPERATURE UNITS in the SETUP menu.
3-46
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.11 MOTORS (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)
(1) HEAD HEATER

This menu is used to activate the head motor.
#HEAD HEATER
>OFF
- OFF : Motor OFF

- 30°C : All head heaters heat until they reach 30°C.
Select an operation with and keys, and confirm with key.
#HEAD HEATER
*30°C
#HEAD HEATER
*30°C OK?
Press key again to start the execution.
#HEAD HEATER
*EXECUTING
End of execution
#HEAD HEATER
>30°C
To stop the head heater, select OFF and confirm with key.
#HEAD HEATER
>OFF
3-47
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2) MEDIA ADV MOTOR

This menu is used to activate the media feed motor.
#MEDIA ADV MOTOR

>OFF
- OFF : Motor OFF

- FORWARDS : Forward feeding (continues until turned OFF)
- BACKWARDS : Back feed (continues until turned OFF)
#MEDIA ADV MOTOR

*BACKWARDS
#MEDIA ADV MOTOR

*BACKWARDS OK?
#MEDIA ADV MOTOR

*EXECUTING
End of execution
#MEDIA ADV MOTOR

>BACKWARDS
To stop the motor, select OFF and confirm with key.
#MEDIA ADV MOTOR

>OFF
3-48
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3) PUMP/WIPE MOTOR

This menu is used to activate the pump/wipe motors.
#PUMP/WIPE MOTOR
>OFF
- OFF : Pump/wipe motors OFF

- FORWARDS : Pump motor ON
- BACKWARDS : Wipe motor ON
#PUMP/WIPE MOTOR
*BACKWARDS
#PUMP/WIPE MOTOR
*BACKWARDS OK?
#PUMP/WIPE MOTOR
*EXECUTING
End of execution
#PUMP/WIPE MOTOR
>BACKWARDS
#PUMP/WIPE MOTOR
>OFF
3-49
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(4) CAP STAT MOTOR

This menu is used to activate the cap.
#CAP STAT MOTOR

>CLOSE
- CLOSE : Closes the cap

- HALF : Releases air
- OPEN : Opens the cap
#CAP MOTOR
*OPEN
#CAP MOTOR
*OPEN OK?
#CAP
*EXECUTING
End of execution
#CAP
>OPEN
3-50
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(5) SUCTION FAN 1, 2, 3, 4

This menu is used to activate a suction fan.
Suction fan 4 is effective only with IP-5620 printers. Do not use it with IP-5520 printers.
#SUCTION FAN 1
>OFF
- OFF
- ON
#SUCTION FAN 1
*ON
#SUCTION FAN 1
*ON OK?
#SUCTION FAN 1
*EXECUTING
End of execution
#SUCTION FAN 1
>ON
#SUCTION FAN 1
>OFF
3-51
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(6) TUR MOTOR

This menu is used to activate the motor of the take-up reel unit (option).
#TUR MOTOR
>OFF
- OFF
- ON
#TUR MOTOR
*ON
#TUR MOTOR
*ON OK?
#TUR MOTOR
*EXECUTING
End of execution
#TUR MOTOR
>ON
#TUR MOTOR
>OFF
3-52
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(7) PH COOLING FAN

This menu is used to activate the print head cooling fan.
#PH COOLING FAN

>OFF
- OFF
- ON
#PH COOLING FAN

*ON
#PH COOLING FAN

*ON OK?
#PH COOLING FAN

*EXECUTING
End of execution
#PH COOLING FAN

>ON
#PH COOLING FAN

>OFF
3-53
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(8) Y MOTOR COOLING FAN

This menu is used to activate the Y motor cooling fan.
#Y MOTOR COOLING FAN

>OFF
- OFF
- ON
#MOTOR COOLING FAN

*ON
#MOTOR COOLING FAN

*ON OK?
#MOTOR COOLING FAN

*EXECUTING
End of execution
#MOTOR COOLING FAN

>ON
#MOTOR COOLING FAN

>OFF
3-54
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.12 COUNTER (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)
(1) MEDIA USED

Displays or sets the length of media used.
#MEDIA USED #MEDIA USED

>0000000ft >0000000m
Press key to allow setting of the length of media used.
#MEDIA USED #MEDIA USED

*0000000ft *0000000m
Setting range: 0 to 214783 m
(2) RESET MEDIA USED

Resets the length of media used.
#RESET MEDIA USED

>
Press key.
#RESET MEDIA USED

*OK?
Press key again to reset the length or press key to cancel resetting.
(3) MEDIA USED 2

Displays the length of media used.
#MEDIA USED 2 #MEDIA USED 2

>0000000ft >0000000m
*This counter cannot be set or reset.
3-55
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(4) TOTAL INK USED

Displays or sets the total amount of ink used.
Select an ink color with and keys.
#TOTAL INK USED(ml)

#Y >000000000
Press key to allow setting of the total amount of ink used.
#TOTAL INK USED(ml)

#Y *000000000
Setting range: 0 to 999999999
(5) RESET TOTAL INK

Resets the total amount of ink used.
#RESET TOTAL INK

#Y >
Press key .
#RESET TOTAL INK

#Y *OK?
Press key again to reset the total amount of ink used or press key to cancel
resetting.
(6) 3RDPARTY INK USED

This menu is used to display the history of third party ink usage.
With the key, enter the lower-stage menu, and with the or key select the ink
color.
#3RDPARTY INK USED

#XX >
- XX: Ink color

- NO: Genuine ink is used
- YES: Non-genuine ink is used
3-56
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(7) 3RDPARTY INK DATE

This menu is used to display the date when third party ink has been used.
When no third party ink has been used, **/**/** is displayed.
With the key, enter the lower-stage menu, and with the or key select the ink
color.
#3RDPARTY INK DATE

#XX *YY/MM/DD
- XX: Ink color
3-57
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.13 ELECT (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

(1) Diagnosis of LEECV board
Diagnoses the LEECV board.
#MAIN PCA
>
Press key.
#MAIN PCA
*OK?
Press key to execute this menu or press to cancel it.
#MAIN PCA
*EXECUTING
When diagnosis succeeded When diagnosis failed
#MAIN PCA #MAIN PCA

*PASS *FAIL XX
XX: Error (bitwise, hexadecimal)

- 01 : ATG error
- 02 : RSM error
- 04 : Band memory error
- 08 : Mask memory error
- 10 : Flash ROM error
3-58
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(2) Diagnosis of LEC board

Diagnoses the LEC board.
#CARRIAGE PCA
>
Press key.
#CARRIAGE PCA
*OK?
#CARRIAGE PCA
*EXECUTING
#CARRIAGE PCA #CARRIAGE PCA

*PASS *FAIL 01
- 01: PTG error
3-59
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3) Ink EEPROM

Check the ink EEPROM.
#INK EEPROM
>XX
XX: Ink color

Press key and select an ink color with and keys.
#INK EEPROM
*XX
#INK EEPROM
*XX OK?
#INK EEPROM #INK EEPROM

*PASS *FAIL YY
YY: Error type (bitwise, hexadecimal)

- 01 : Y ink error
- 02 : M ink error
- 04 : C ink error
- 08 : K ink error
- 10 : Lm ink error
- 20 : Lc ink error
3-60
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(4) VDD
Apply the voltage selected to VDD voltage.
#VDD
>20V
- 25 V
- 20 V
- 15 V
Press key and select a voltage with and keys.
#VDD
*25V
#VDD
*25V OK?
#VDD
>25V
3-61
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.4.14 PH.INF (Displayed in the maintenance mode only)

(1) SELECT PH COLOR
Displays or sets print head information.
Select a head with and keys, and confirm with key.
#SELECT PH COLOR
>Y
Select an item with and keys.

ZZ : Head
#SERIAL NUMBER ZZ YYYYYYYYYY : Serial number
*YYYYYYYYYY
- SERIAL NUMBER
- HEAD VOLTAGE RANK (A/B)
- DOT COUNTER
- JAM COUNTER
ZZ : Head
#SERIAL NUMVER ZZ YYYYYYYYYY : Serial number
*YYYYYYYYYY
#HEAD VOLTAGE RANK A ZZ ZZ : Head

XX.X : Head rank
*XX.XV
Range : 23.0V to 32.0V
#HEAD VOLTAGE RANK B ZZ ZZ : Head

XX.X : Head rank
*XX.XV
Range : 23.0V to 32.0V
#DOT COUNTER ZZ ZZ : Head

XXXXXXX : Discharge counter (in units of million)
*XXXXXXM
#JAM COUNT ZZ ZZ : Head

XXXXX : Jam count
*XXXXX
Range : 0 to 65535
3-62
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.5 Special Operations
The printer can enter the special operation mode by pressing the key and another key
at the same time when the printer is turned on. (The hatched operations are not available to
users.)
Combination of keys Special mode
Language setting mode

＋ (Goes directly to SETUP - LANGUAGE menu in the user mode.)
Installation startup skip mode

(When none of the six heads is installed, "Starting Installation" is
＋
not performed.)
POC skip mode

＋ (Boots the printer without performing POC.)
Fatal error neglect mode

＋＋ (Panel operation is enabled even if a fatal error occurs.)
3.5.1 Language Setting Mode

This mode is used when menus cannot be understood because another language is set or
when changing the ink color number setting.
When the printer enters this mode, the language on the LCD changes to ENGLISH automatically,
and the menus to set language, time zone, length unit, and temperature unit are displayed.
Note
See 3.6.1 Starting Language Setting for details.
3.5.2 Installation Start Skip Mode

This mode is used to skip installation start.
The guidance to install heads (Starting Installation) is skipped in this mode when the printer is
turned on with no head installed.
Note
See 3.6.2 Starting Installation for details.
3-63
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.5.3 POC Skip Mode (Not available to users)

This mode functions in the same way as normal startup operation except that POC is skipped.
This mode is prepared to operate the printer forcibly when POC error has occurred. (However,
this doe not ensure printer operation as an error has occurred.)
Actually the printer does not skip the POC processing, but always replies the POC error as
normal value.
Note
POC error: System error 1010 to 110B
3.5.4 Fatal Error Neglect Mode (Not available to users)

This mode is provided to enable panel operation even in the case where unrecoverable error
has occurred.
If the printer starts up with this mode, the password entry screen appears for access to the
maintenance mode. This mode continues until the printer is shut down.
MAINTENANCE MODE
PASSWORD?
When a correct password is entered, the printer starts up with this mode.
This mode is used for:

- Long-time storage error clearance
- Parameter initialization
- Monitor check
- Online update
- Version check with carriage fixed
In this mode, the printer does not

- Go to online state.
- Detect or display errors.
- Perform carriage-related functions (print, cleaning).
- Update time managed by the carriage.
3-64
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.6 Operation Guidance
A 3-digit time counter displayed for each guidance decreases at intervals of 10 seconds with
the passage of time.
3.6.1 Starting Language Setting

The following menu appears when the printer is turned on for the first time after shipping or it is
booted with and keys (special mode).
If no print head is installed, the installation guidance appears after this setting.
INITIALIZING...
PLEASE WAIT
Select a language and press key.
#LANGUAGE
*ENGLISH
Press key to confirm the selected language or press key to set a language
again.
#LANGUAGE
*ENGLISH OK?
Set a time zone and press key.
#TIME ZONE (GMT+)

*YY/MM/DD HH:MM +00
Press key to confirm the selected time zone or press key to set a time zone
again.
#TIME ZONE (GMT+)）

*YY/MM/DD HH:MM OK?
3-65
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Set a unit of length and press key.
#LENGTH UNITS
* MILIMETERS
Press key to confirm the selected unit or press key to set a unit of length again.
#LENGTH UNITS
* MILIMETERS OK?
Set a unit of temperature and press key.
#TEMPERATURE UNITS
*CENTIGRADE
Press key to confirm the selected unit or press key to set a unit of temperature
again.
#TEMPERATURE UNITS
*CENTIGRADE OK?
Set an ink type and press key.
#INK TYPES
*GX
Press key to confirm the selected ink type or press key to set an ink type again.
#INK TYPES
*GX OK?
3-66
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Set the number of ink colors and press key.
#No. OF INK COLORS

*6 COLORS
Press key to confirm the number of ink color or press key to set the number of
ink color again.
#NO. OF INK COLORS

*6 COLORS OK?
End of language setting
INITIALIZING...
PLEASE WAIT
Note
You cannot return to an item once it has been set.
To cancel a wrong setting, shut down the printer and then enter this mode again.
3-67
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.6.2 Starting Installation

The following menu appears if the printer is turned on with no print head installed.
INITIALIZING...
PLEASE WAIT
OPEN COVER

CLOSE COVER
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
#PRINT HEAD INFO

*OK?
#WIPER LIQUID
*OK?
#Y SERIAL NUMBER
*0000000000
Voltage rank A
Voltage rank B
Serial number
3-68
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
#INPUT VALUE CHECK

*OK?
#Y HEAD VOLTAGE RANK A

*00.0V
#INPUT VALUE CHECK

*OK?
#Y HEAD VOLTAGE RANK B

*00.0V
#INPUT VALUE CHECK

*OK?
Enter the settings for M, C, K, Lm, and Lc heads in the same way.
#INSTALL PRINTHEAD
*OK?
Press key.
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
After the carriage moves
OPEN COVER
PERFORM CAP CLEANING
Open the cover and install the print heads.
INSTALL PRINTHEAD
CLOSE COVER
3-69
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
When head works correctly When head works incorrectly (XX: Head)
CARRIAGE MOVING OPEN COVER

PLEASE WAIT CHECK XX PRINTHEAD
Open the cover.
CHECK PRINTHEAD
CLOSE COVER
Press to start charging ink or to cancel ink charge.
INK FILL
*OK?
When key is pressed When key is pressed
START INK FILL CANCEL INK FILL

*BOTTLE OK? *OK?
Press key. key
INK FILLING
XXX
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
3-70
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3.7 Management of System Information
System information managed by the engine, such as mechanism adjustment parameters,

counters of print distance, etc., and ink cartridge information, is stored in the serial EEPROM.
System information is loaded to the RAM or flash memory as required during operation or for
backup.
(1) RAM area: Current system data is stored.
(2) EEPROM area: Default values of system information at power on are stored.
(3) Flash memory area: Structural data and default data of EEPROM are stored.
EEPROM data at the time of shipping and backup data of EEPROM are stored.
7
<RAM> <EEPROM>
Current system data 6 Default values of
7 system information
6 (8KB)
<EEPROM>
5 Default values of
<Flash>
system backup
System information
data
4
5 (8KB)
4 <Flash>
System backup data
3 (8KB)
<Flash>
Factory default setting area
2 (8KB)
3
2 <Flash>
Factory default setting area
(8KB)
<Flash>
Program and data
<Flash>
1 EEPROM
Program and data
structural data and
1 default data
EEPROM
Path 1: Initialization of EEPROM (Flash EEPROM) structural data and
<Processing> default data
(1) Initializes EEPROM with the default values of the program. Correction values of
the engine become the values before adjustment.
<Operation and start timing>

(1) This initialization can be performed with the menu (maintenance mode) on the
operation panel.
- System menu: INIT EEPROM
NOTE: Restart the printer after initialization.
3-71
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Path 2: Storing factory default settings in the flash memory (EEPROM→Flash)）

<Processing>
(1) Stores all EEPROM data in the factory default setting area of the flash memory.
(1) This storing can be performed with the menu (maintenance mode) on the
operation panel.
- System menu: SAVE CALIBS
Path 3: Restoring factory default settings in the EEPROM (Flash→EEPROM)）

<Processing>
(1) Writes a part of information (*1) of the EEPROM factory default settings saved in
the flash memory into the EEPROM.
*1: Printer data, media registration data, correction/adjustment parameters (except
life-limited parts counter)
(1) Operation can be executed from the menu on the operation panel (user mode and
maintenance mode).
- System menu: FACTORY DEFAULT (user mode)
- System menu: RESTORE CALIBS (maintenance mode)
NOTE: Restart the printer after restoration.
Path 4: Storing EEPROM data for backup in the flash memory (EEPROM→Flash)
<Processing>
(1) Stores all current system data in the EEPROM backup area of the flash memory.
(1) This is performed when the power is shut down.
(2) This storing can be performed with the menu (maintenance mode) on the
operation panel.
- System menu: SAVE EEPROM
Path 5: Restoring EEPROM backup data from the flash memory in EEPROM (Flash→
EEPROM)
<Processing>
(1) Writes all the EEPROM backup data saved in the flash memory into the EEPROM.
(1) This restoration can be performed with the menu (maintenance mode) on the
operation panel.
- System menu: RESTORE EEPROM
NOTE: Restart the printer after restoration.
Path 6:RAM → EEPROM
Path 7:EEPROM → RAM

(1) Path 6 and Path 7 are used for the engine firmware as required.
3-72
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 4 Troubleshooting (General)
SECTION 4 TROUBLESHOOTING (GENERAL)
This section describes general troubleshooting of the printer.

Check the following items before suspecting a failure of the printer.
4.1 Check Items on the Occurrence of Problem
Symptom Check Item Corrective Measure
Connection of power cable Connect the power cable correctly to an outlet.

No powering Power supply to outlet Supply power to the outlet.
Power switch ON/OFF Turn the power switch ON.
ERROR lamp and LCD message Take appropriate measures according to the
The printer fails to
error message.
start or operate
=>See Section 6 When an error message is
normally.
displayed in the User's Guide.
Connection of interface cable Connect the interface cable properly.
ERROR lamp and LCD message Take appropriate measures according to the
error message.
=>See Section 6 When an error message is
Cannot print
displayed in the User's Guide.
ERROR lamp OFF Print the engine self pattern.
=>See Section 3 ADJUST MENU in the User's
Guide.
The transmitted DATA lamp (flashing?) Check the communication condition with the
data is not computer.
processed
immediately.
Media type Use a media specified by Seiko.
=> See Appendix Consumables in the User's
Guide.
Ink type Use an ink specified by Seiko.
Poor print quality => See Appendix Consumables in the User's
Guide.
Print head cleaning Clean the print heads.
=> See Section 4 Print head cleaning in the
User's Guide.
Media type Check whether the loaded media type meets
the media settings.
=> See Section 2 Media replacement in the
User's Guide.
=> See Appendix Consumables in the User's
Media jams occur Guide.
frequently Media setting Set the media correctly.
=> See Section 2 Media replacement in the
User's Guide.
Check whether there is any Remove the foreign material.
foreign material in the carriage => See Section 6 How to clear media jams in
path or the media feed path. the User's Guide.
4-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4.2 Measures to be Taken when the Printer Malfunctions
A no-ink message Improper setting of ink cartridge Check whether the ink cartridge is inserted
appears even properly.
when there is
enough ink.
Motor problem Test and check the motor operation with
Abnormal sound
maintenance mode.
4.3 Measures to Solve Print Quality Problems
Blank data is transmitted. Check print data.

A blank sheet is output The environmental conditions do Keep the room temperature at more than 15
or the printout is not not meet the printer specifications. degree C (23 degree C, if possible) and let the
clear. printer warm sufficiently.
The media setting is not correct. Check the media settings.
Parts of drawing are Foreign objects are attached to the Perform cleaning using PH.REC menu.
missing or the printout head.
is unclear.
The media is loaded inside out. Check whether the media is set correctly. Set
the flange properly.
The printout is blurred.
The media is set incorrectly. Check the media settings.
Low heater temperature Raise the preset temperature of the heater.
The leading edge of media is Check whether the leading edge of media is
curled. curled. If it is curled, cut the edge.
The media is slightly folded or If it is wrinkled, feed the media to cut off the
The printout is stained. wrinkled. wrinkled part.
The media is set improperly, and Set the media again properly.
so the media is wrinkled.
The platen is stained. Clean the platen.
Parts of drawing are Ambient temperature Use the printer in a recommended
missing at print start. environment.
Parts of drawing are still A nozzle is clogged. Perform the fill cap operation.
missing in spite of
repeated cleaning.
The cap is stained. Check whether the cap is stained. If it is
Poor print quality stained, clean it with the cleaning liquid.
cannot be improved in The wiper is stained. Check whether the wiper is stained. If it is
spite of cleaning. stained, check that there is enough wiper
cleaning liquid.
4-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4.4 Check Items for Heater Errors
Check whether the voltage Connect properly.

During the heater test, the
changeover switch ASSY is
heater does not heat up. (+ is
connected to each heater.
displayed as well as the
Malfunction of the TRC-CV Replace the TRC-CV board.
preset and the current
board
temperature.)
Malfunction of the heater Replace the heater.
The heater heats up during Heater settings for each Change the heater setting for each
the heater test, but not during media media.
printing.
Influence of air conditioning Avoid the influence of air conditioning.
Malfunction of the thermistor, Replace the ASSY including the
Only the Preheater (or only
disconnection or contact thermistor.
the After heater) does not
failure of the thermistor cable
heat up enough.
Malfunction of the LEECV Replace the LEECV board.
board
Malfunction of the thermistor, Replace the ASSY including the
Displays unusual actual disconnected or thermistor.
temperature. unconnected thermistor
cable
Check whether the Connect properly.
thermistor cable is connected
to the right point.
The heater heats up to an Check whether the voltage Connect properly.
abnormally high temperature. changeover switch ASSY is
connected to each heater.
Malfunction of the LEECV Replace the LEECV board.
board
Low ambient temperature Raise the ambient temperature.
Check whether the voltage Set the voltage changeover switch
The heater heats up slowly.
changeover switch is set correctly.
correctly.
Check whether the voltage Set the voltage changeover switch
The heater temperature does
changeover switch is set correctly.
not reach the preset level.
correctly.
4-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 5 Troubleshooting (Engine Section and USB Controller Section)
SECTION 5 TROUBLESHOOTING
(ENGINE SECTION AND USB CONTROLLER SECTION)
This section describes troubleshooting for the engine section and USB controller section of the
printer.
Error messages are rarely displayed for poor print quality. In other cases when an error occurs
in the printer, the ERROR lamp lights up, and the relevant error message appears on the LCD.
Poor print quality is checked mainly by printing a nozzle check pattern. When an error message
appears, check the possible causes and the location according to the error message and then
take appropriate measures. If no error message appears, find the possible causes and the
location from the symptom and take appropriate measures.
5.1 Poor Print Quality
In most cases of poor print quality, no error message is displayed on the LCD.
When the poor print quality is caused by a head problem, it can usually be detected with the
test pattern (in user mode) or the nozzle check (in maintenance mode).
The criteria below are used to judge the poor print quality caused by a head error during the
printer installation or operation.
1) The check pattern shall be within the range of error mode which can be verified by the
nozzle check pattern.
2) Find the cause by grouping electric system errors and ink system errors.
(a) No output from all heads ················· EL system
(b) No output from one head
Change the cable connection from the defective head to another and output the
pattern.
- When the symptom still remains ...Ink system or head
- When the symptom shifts to another head ...EL system
3) Finding cause when an error is due to the ink system

(a) When the ink cannot be filled:
Possible causes of no ink filling are shown below.
- Stained cap·························· Clean the cap using the cap cleaning liquid.
- Capping position not aligned ··· Align the cap position. (See 7.5)
- Poor suction of capping ·········· Replace the cap unit or faulty parts.(PUMP
ASSY, VALVE-ASSY,HOLDER(VALVE), CAP
ASSY)
- Air leakage from capping tube Tighten the joint.
- Cam phase not aligned ·········· Adjust the cam home position. Replace the
SWITCH (CAP)-ASSY.
5-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
- Ink supply tube bending ·········· Extend the tube bending.

- Stained head nozzle surface .......Charge the wiper cleaning liquid.
(b) When air remains in the ink tube:

Small amount of air in the ink tube does not affect printing. However, large
amount of air may cause improper ink discharging.
- Insufficient cap suction ............ Replace the cap unit or faulty parts.
(PUMP ASSY, VALVE-ASSY,
HOLDER(VALVE), CAP ASSY)
- Air leakage from tube .............. Tighten the joint.
- Air leakage from head .............. Replace the head.
4) Measures when an error is due to the head:

When poor discharge is due to the head, perform the measures below. If the error still
remains, replace the head.
(a) Cleaning
- This cleaning is performed in the user mode. This serves to remove air and dust
in the head unit, and to form meniscus normally. Normal cleaning can rectify
most of such errors.
- See the user's guide for procedures.
(b) Fill cap

- This function is available by executing fill cap in the user mode. This serves to fill
the cap with ink, to supply ink to the head (nozzle surface), and to remove nozzle
clogging by leaving the printer for a while. This is used when print defects occur
in spite of repeated cleaning.
Leave the printer in fill cap condition for one to two hours. If the print defects still
remain after being left for 24 hours, perform a smart nozzle mapping (nozzle
map). If the problem still cannot be resolved, contact our service center.
(c) Ink removal

- If the printer cannot restore normal operation even after the measures (1) and (2)
are taken, the air entered the head cannot be bled in some cases. In such a case,
it is recommended to leave the printer for 1 to 2 hours or to remove and recharge
the ink. (The waste ink bottle must be empty when removing the ink.)
- See 3.4.2 for details.
- Do not operate the printer for one hour after ink charging.
(d) Cleaning with cleaning liquid cartridge.

- Depending on transport conditions or long-time leaving, the error may not be
cleared only by ink removal. In such a case, use the Cleaning Liquid Cartridge
supplied as cleaning ink to clean the ink tube, air damper filter, filter in the head,
and nozzles. (Use an empty waste ink bottle also for this cleaning.)
- See the Section 4 Periodic maintenance in the User's Guide for procedures.
5-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5) When an error is due to head friction or media jam:

- When media jam or head rubbing occurs frequently during printing, the nozzle
plate of the head may be damaged. This may deflect print even if it does not lead
to clogged nozzles, which may deteriorate print quality.
- Check the head height as a preventive measure.
Furthermore, review the operation, use optimum media, set media correctly, and
prepare proper operating environment.
- Run trial operation to prevent rubbing when starting printing.
- Review the heater temperature to prevent rubbing during printing.
- If the problem is not resolved by any means, replace the head itself.
6) When nozzles of a head frequently clog during printing:

- Check that the head voltage is set correctly according to the recommended
voltage indicated on the head.
7) Ink adhesion
- When ink adheres to the carriage cable or head cable, wipe it off immediately.
- Replace a damaged part, if any, with a new one.
5.2 Error Message Types
Error messages are classified as follows according to content of errors.
(1) Operator Call Error

This type of message can be handled by an operator.
(2) Warning
This type of message can be handled by an operator.
(3) System error

This type of message must be handled by our service centers.
5-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.3 Operator Call Errors
Error messages below can be handled by an operator.
(Ink cartridge errors)

YY: Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc
REPLACE
YY INK CARTRIDGE
Description: Ink runs out.

Measure: Take appropriate measures following the message.
If this message appears when ink is full, check the following items:
- Slit on the ink cartridge
- Dirt on the ink end sensor or insufficient contact on the sensor
YY: Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc
CHECK Z Z: Error code
YY INK CARTRIDGE 0 Write protect signal error
1 Check sum error
2 Different color
3 Different type (OEM code)
Description: Ink cartridge error has occurred. 4 Hash error
Measure: Check the following items: 5 I/O error
- Insufficient contact on electrode 6 Upper limit error
7 Serial ID I/O error
of the ink cartridge 8 Different custom serial ID
- Connection of PCB-ASSY-B1 board 9 Ink remaining history error
connector
- Connection between PCB-ASSY-JUN1
board and PCB-ASSY-LEECV board
- Replacement of INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
INSTALL
YY INK CARTRIDGE YY:Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc
Description: No ink cartridge is installed.

Measure: Check the following items:
- Insufficient contact on electrode of the ink cartridge
- Connection of PCB-ASSY-B1 board connector
- Connection between PCB-ASSY-JUN1 board and PCB-ASSY-LEECV board
- Replacement of INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
- System date
5-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(Waste ink bottle errors)
BOTTLE OUT
INSTALL BOTTLE
Description: Waste ink bottle is not installed.

- Installation of the waste bottle switch and connection of the connector
- Defect on the waste bottle switch
- Connection between the waste bottle relay connector and PCB-ASSY-JUN1
board
- Connection between PCB-ASSY-JUN1 board and PCB-ASSY-LEE-CV board
- EEPROM on PCB-ASSY-LEECV board
BOTTLE FULL
REPLACE BOTTLE
Description: Waste ink bottle is full.

Measure: Take appropriate measures following the message.
(Media jam)
WARNING! (1)
CLEAR MEDIA JAM
Description: Media jam (1) occurs when the printer cannot feed media due to an obstacle in
the carriage path.
Measure: Take appropriate measures according to the message. Check the following
items if media jam (1) occurs frequently without actual paper jam or any obstacle
in the carriage path or media feed path.
- Y motor
- Operation load on the carriage
- Dirt on the T fence
WARNING! (2)- Y encoder

CLEAR MEDIA JAM
Description: Media jam (2) occurs when media is not detected properly, because roll paper or
cut sheet paper is not selected properly, or because cut paper of unspecified
size is used.
Measure: Check or change the following items:
- Edge sensor
- Change the media to another type of media.
- Stain on the reflection free tape on the platen
5-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(Media errors)
LIFT LEVER
SET MEDIA
Description: Media runs out or the flange is set incorrectly to the flange holder.
Measure: Set new media or check the following items:
- Media feed sensor
- Media output sensor
- Roll end sensor
LIFT LEVER
CHECK MEDIA
Description: Media of an invalid size is set: Smaller than 297 mm, wider than 64 inches
(IP-5620)/54 inches (IP-5520).
Measure: Set media of correct size or check or change the following items:
- Edge sensor
MEDIA MISALIGNED
RELOAD MEDIA
Description: Skew arose during setting of the media.

Measure: Check or change the following items:
- Edge sensor
LOAD MEDIA
LOWER LEVER
Description: The lever is raised.

Measure: Set media again following the message.
If the lever up/down action does not result in the message change, check the
following items.
- Lever sensor
- Connection between the lever sensor and the connector
5-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
MEDIA MISALIGNED The ONLINE LED blinks.

(The printer is in the pause state.)
OK/CANCEL
The ONLINE LED blinks.
Description: The media is skewed. (The printer is in the pause state.)
Measure: Press key to continue printing or key to cancel printing.
Ink may be discharged onto the platen depending on skew conditions. In that
case, wipe ink completely off the platen.
key is pressed: key is pressed:
PRINTING MEDIA MISALIGNED

ROLL:XXXX/PAPER RELOAD MEDIA
5-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(Print head errors)
PH TEMP.ERROR
PLEASE WAIT
Description: The head temperature is out of operating temperature range.

Measure: If the temperature is not recovered after waiting for a while, check the following
items:
- Cable between head and LEC4 board
- Head
- LEC4 board
PH TEMP. ERROR
OK/CANCEL
Description: The head temperature is out of operating temperature range.

If you canceled the print, wait for a while before starting printing again.
If the problem is not solved even after waiting for a while, check the following
items.
- Cable between head and LEC4 board
- Head
- LEC4 board
XX : Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc
XX PH TEMP ERROR
CHECK PRINTHEAD
Description: This message appears requesting head check when a head temperature error is
detected.
Measure: Check connection of the head cable (both LEC4 side and head side). If the cable
connectors are dirty, clean them softly.
Do not perform cleaning or printing until this error is cleared.
XX PH DETECT ERROR XX : Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc
CHECK PRINTHEAD
Description: This message appears requesting head check when a no head error is detected.
Measure: Check connection of the head cable (both LEC4 side and head side). If the cable
connectors are dirty, clean them softly.
Do not perform cleaning or printing until this is cleared.
5-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(Others)
CLOSE COVER
Description: The cover is open.

- Is the cover slightly lifted?
- Cover lock switch and interlock switch
ENV.TEMP.ERROR
CHANGE ENV TEMP
Description: The ambient temperature is out of the operating temperature range.

- Ambient temperature
- Environment thermistor
ENV.TEMP.ERROR
OK/CANCEL
Description: The ambient temperature is out of the operating temperature range.

If you canceled the print, wait for a while before starting printing again.
If the problem is not solved even after waiting for a while, check the following
items.
- Ambient temperature
- Environment thermistor
INK CHARGE NOT DONE

CHARGE INK SYS
Description: This message appears requesting ink charge if cleaning or printing is performed
when ink charge is not completed.
Measure: Charge ink.
Do not perform cleaning or printing until ink charge finishes.
- Fill ink or finish the ink filling mode on the operation panel.
- Replace EEPROM on LEECV board.
5-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.4 Warning
Warning messages are shown below.

Warning displayed on the LCD can be reset by pressing any key on the operation panel.
Warning indicated by flashing LED can be reset by removing the error cause.
5.4.1 Daily Maintenance Warning
PERFORM WEEKLY
MAINTENANCE NOW
Description: This message appears when the periodic maintenance (cleaning of the cap unit)
has not been performed.
Measure: Execute the periodic maintenance.
- Replace the EEPROM on the LEECV board.
- Check the system timer runs normally.
5.4.2 Wiper Blade Life Warning

REPLACE
WIPER BLADE
Description: This warning appears when the life of wiper blade is coming to end.
Measure: Replace the part according to the guidance. If the error is not cancelled when
you select YES after the replacement, check the EEPROM on the LEECV board.
5.4.3 Wiper Sponge Life Warning

REPLACE
WIPER SPONGE
Description: This warning appears when the life of wiper sponge is coming to end.
you input YES after the replacement, check the EEPROM on the LEECV board.
5.4.4 Wiper Cleaning Liquid Replacement Warning

REPLACE
WIPE CLEANING LIQUID
Description: This warning appears when the time has come to replace the wiper cleaning
liquid.
you input YES after the replacement, check the EEPROM on the LEECV board.
5-10
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.4.5 Cleaning Non Execution Warning

PERFORM
PH RECOVERY NOW
Description: - This warning appears when the cleaning mode is set to off and cleaning has
not been performed for a certain period of time.
- This warning appears when cleaning is performed automatically at the start of
the next printing.
Measure: Perform cleaning NORMAL.
If the warning still appears even after cleaning, check the EEPROM on the
LEECV board.
5.4.6 Media Wrinkles Warning

CHECK MEDIA
WRINKLES
Description: Check for media wrinkles.

Measure: If the media wrinkles, set the media again or feed it to a part not wrinkled.
* Printing on wrinkled media may damage the nozzle surface.
5.4.7 Ink Shortage Warning

- Ink LED flashing:
Description: Ink is running out. This warning is cleared by replacing the ink.
Measure: Check that there is any ink cartridge of which remaining amount is 10% or less.
5.4.8 Take-up Time-out Warning

- Media LED flashing:
Description: Time out occurs in the take-up reel unit.

- Tur motor
- Slack sensor
5 - 11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5 System Errors
This warning shows an error caused during operation.

Restart the printer, and if error occurs again, contact our service center.
Get information from the user on the error time, error frequency, operation made immediately
before the error, ambient temperature, etc. with respect to the error occurrence condition.
Follow the steps below in the case of system error.
(a) When the faulty part is identified, replace the module.

(b) When multiple faulty parts are considered, find the cause. Enter the
maintenance mode with the specific power-on method, and check whether the
circuit system functions properly with the monitor function (to display data read
by sensors). If the circuit system is normal even with a system error occurrence,
the printer can be operated. If the front cover is open, the +24 V and +36 V
power cannot be generated.
Error Error status display
ATG/RSM load error System error 1010

PTG load error System error 1011
Flash ROM error System error 1100
ATG/RSM error System error 1101
FFC error System error 1102
TRC connection error System error 1103
JUN connection error System error 1104
PTG error System error 1105
Power error System error 1106
Carriage I/F error System error 1107
USB error System error 1108
EEPROM error System error 1109
Band memory error System error 110A
Cap position adjustment value error System error 110B
ATG block clear error System error 1110
Suction fan error System error 112x (x: Fan type)
ATG DMA error System error 1130
Flash I/O error System error 1140
Home position sensor error System error 1150
Wipe position sensor error System error 1160
Ambient temperature error System error 1170
Pump/wipe motor overcurrent System error 1180
Head drive voltage error System error 119x (x: Head type)
Serial EEPROM I/O error System error 11A0
Cooling fan error System error 11D0
Long-time storage error System error 11E0
Y head cooling fan error System error 11F0
Head drive IC temperature error System error 120X (X: Position)
5-12
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Error Error status display
Edge sensor error System error 1220

FFC error System error 126x (x FFC cable type)
Replacing life-limited parts System error 1290
Cap sensor error System error 1310
Heater thermistor error System error 140x（x:Heater type）
Heater error (High temperature) System error 141x（x:Heater type）
Heater error (Target System error 143x（x:Heater type）
Heater error (No interruption) System error 144x（x:Heater type）
Program error System error 2000
Program error System error 22xx (xx: Detail content)
Program error System error 41xx (xx: Detail content)
TLB error exception (read) System error 1000
TLB error exception (write) System error 1001
Initial page exception System error 1002
TLB protect exception (read) System error 1003
TLB protect exception (write) System error 1004
CPU address exception (read) System error 1005
CPU address exception (write) System error 1006
Unconditional trap System error 1007
Reserved command code exception System error 1008
Slot exception System error 1009
User break point System error 100A
DMA address exception System error 100B
5-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.1 System Error 1010: ATG/RSM loading error

<Description>
This error occurs when the program has not been loaded normally from the flash
ROM on the LEECV board to the ASIC on the LEECV board, or when the
checksum of the program has not been performed correctly.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEECV board
<Corrective measures>
(a) Reinstall the firmware.
(b) Replace the LEECV board.
5.5.2 System Error 1011: PTG loading error

<Description>
This error occurs when the program has not been loaded normally from the flash
ROM on the LEECV board to the ASIC on the LEC4 board, or when the
checksum of the program has not been performed correctly.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEC4 board
(b) FFC cable FFC3 to 6-ASSY
(c) LEECV board
(a) Reinstall the firmware.
(b) Reconnect the FFC cable (LEC4 board side and LEECV board side). Wipe
off lightly the stain on the cable terminal sections, if any.
(c) Check whether the FFC cable is damaged.
(d) If the error is not rectified, replace the LEC4 board.
(e) If the error is not rectified, replace the LEECV board.
(f) If the error is not rectified, replace the FFC cable.
5.5.3 System Error 1100: Flash ROM error

<Description>
The program stored in the flash ROM cannot be read normally.
This error can be checked by performing sum check of the program area when
the printer is booted.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEECV board
(b) Reinstall the firmware.
(c) Replace the LEECV board.
5-14
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.4 System Error 1101: ATG/RSM error

<Description>
The ATG/RSM registers and RSM mask memory data cannot be read or written
normally.
This error can be checked as follows: Write specific data from the register via
8-bit or 32-bit access at the printer startup, and then read the register data to
judge whether the data is correct.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEECV board
(a) Replace the LEECV board.
5.5.5 System Error 1102: FFC error

<Description>
The FFC between the LEE board and LEC board is not connected.
This error can be checked by using the detect function through the RSM port at
the printer startup.
<Faulty module>
(a) FFC cable FFC3 to 6-ASSY
(b) LEC4 board
(c) LEECV board
(a) Reconnect the FFC cable (LEC4 board side and LEECV board side). Wipe
off lightly the stain on the cable terminal area, if any.
(b) Check whether the FFC cable is damaged.
(c) If the error is not rectified, replace the LEC4 board.
(d) If the error is not rectified, replace the LEECV board.
(e) If the error is not rectified, replace the FFC cable.
5-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.6 System Error 1103: TRC connection error

<Description>
The cable between the LEE board and TRC board is not connected.
<Faulty module>
(a) CABLE(TRC-CTL) - ASSY
(b) TRC-CV board
(c) LEECV board
(a) Reconnect the CABLE(TRC-CTL) - ASSY (TRC side and LEECV board
side).
(b) Check whether the CABLE(TRC-CTL) - ASSY is damaged.
(c) If the error is not rectified, replace the TRC-CV board.
5.5.7 System Error 1104: JUN connection error

<Description>
The FFC between the LEE board and JUN board is not connected.
<Faulty module>
(a) FFC cable FFC1-ASSY and FFC2-ASSY
(b) JUN1 board
(c) LEECV board
(a) Reconnect the FFC cable (JUN1 board side and LEECV board side). Wipe
(c) If the error is not rectified, replace the JUN1 board.
5-16
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.8 System Error 1105: PTG error

<Description>
The PTG registers cannot be read or written normally.
This error can be checked as follows: Write specific data from the register via
16-bit access at the printer startup, and then read the register data to judge
whether the data is correct.
<Faulty module>
(b) LEC4 board
(c) LEECV board
5.5.9 System Error 1106: Power error

<Description>
DC power (+36, +24, +12V, P36V_LEC) on the LEE board is not generated
properly. This error can be checked at the printer startup.
<Faulty module>
(a) Harness and interlock switch on the front cover
(b) CABLE(TRC-CTL) -ASSY between the TRC board and LEECV board
(c) LEECV board
(d) TRC-CV board
(e) Mechanical loads (motor, fan, etc.) to which power is supplied and relevant
harnesses
(f) LEC4 board and FFC cable FFC1 to 6-ASSY
(a) Check that the front cover is closed and the interlock switch is ON.
(b) Check that CABLE(TRC-CTL) -ASSY is properly connected to CN4 on the
LEE board and to CN3 on the TRC board. Reconnect it if necessary.
(c) Check the lighting status of LED35 (12V), LED36 (36V), LED37 (P36V_LEC),
and LED38 (24V) on the LEECV board. If any LED is OFF, its power is not
generated properly. In that case, perform general troubleshooting according
to the table below, and check whether there is any short-circuit in the parts or
harnesses.
5-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Power supply Possible faulty parts

status
12V 24V 36V

ｘｘｘ LEC4 board
○ ｘｘ Interlock switch
○ ｘ ○ Pump/wipe motor, take-up motor, suction fan,
Y motor cooling fan, media cooling fan
○ ○ ○ LEC4 board
○ ○ ｘ X/Y motor, power supply cooling fan
(d) If the error is not rectified, replace the LEECV board. To check short-circuit on
the LEECV board, measure the resistance between the locations shown
below and the screws securing the board, and check whether the measured
value is extremely low or not.
TP No. TP No.
TP148 TP364
TP29 TP362
TP187 TP360
TP314 TP326
TP365 TP293
5-18
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.10 System Error 1107: Carriage I/F error

<Description>
The carriage interface is not connected properly.
This error can be checked by monitoring the reference voltage on the LEC board
at the printer startup.
<Faulty module>
(b) LEC4 board
(c) LEECV board
5.5.11 System Error 1108: USB error

<Description>
USB communication is not performed normally.
This error can be checked by reading/writing the USB chip register at the printer
startup.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEECV board
5-19
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.12 System Error 1109: EEPROM error

<Description>
Parameters saved in the EEPROM on the LEECV board cannot be read
correctly. This error can be checked by performing sum check and keyword
check of the parameter area at the printer startup.
<Faulty module>
(a) EEPROM
(b) LEECV board
(a) Replace EEPROM (LEECV board, location: 4L).
Notes
When EEPROM error occurs, the process below is executed.
1) When the current parameters (system parameters) saved in the flash ROM are normal
-> Rewrites all areas from the flash ROM to EEPROM.
Informs a POC error when the printer is started.
The printer starts normally after restart.
Causes a POC error again if the EEPROM is faulty.
2) When the current parameters saved in the flash ROM are also broken
-> Displays a POC error
However, the parameters cannot be initialized unless the operator enters the password
for customer engineer. Initialize the printer to the ROM default values.
* Saving parameters
Parameters stored in the EEPROM are saved in the flash ROM in two ways.
1) Factory setting
2) Current setting (system parameters)
In the case of saving factory setting:

A) Execute SAVE CALIBS (maintenance mode) via panel operation.
In the case of saving current setting:

A) Execute SAVE EEPROM (maintenance mode) by panel operation.
B) Automatic saving at shutdown
Save all areas of the EEPROM in the flash ROM.
5-20
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.13 System Error 110A: Band memory error

<Description>
The SDRAM (band memory) on the LEECV board cannot be read or written
normally from the CPU. This error is detected as follows: When the printer is
started up, a specific data is written via 32-bit access in the first 256 bytes of
each bank, and then the data is read via 32-bit access from the first 256 bytes of
each bank. Then the read data is judged to be correct or not.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEECV board
5.5.14 System error 110B: Cap position adjustment value error

<Description>
The adjustment value of the cap position is 0 (not adjusted yet).
(The adjustment value of the cap position must be other than 0.)
<Faulty module>
(a) Data in the EEPROM on the LEECV board is abnormal.
(a) Start up in the fatal error invalid mode and perform 7.5 Correcting the cap
position to set the adjustment value to other than 0.
5.5.15 System error 1110: ATG block clear error

<Description>
When ATG clears band memory, the clearing sequence cannot be finished.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEECV board
5-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.16 System Error 112X: Suction fan error

<Description>
x = 0: Suction fan 1 (under the platen on the cap side) does not rotate.
x = 1: Suction fan 2 (under the platen near the cap side at the center) does not
rotate.
x = 2: Suction fan 3 (under the platen near the maintenance area side at the
center) does not rotate.
x = 3: Suction fan 4 (under the platen on the maintenance area side) does not
rotate. (IP-5620 only)
These errors can be checked during printing.
<Faulty module>
(a) Suction fan
(b) LEECV board
(c) Sensor cable CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV)
(a) Remove the media and restart the printer to enter the maintenance mode.
Control the fan motor via the motors menu, and check whether it rotates
properly with normal sound.
(b) Replace the suction fan.
(c) Check the sensor cable.
(d) If the error is not rectified even after the fan is replaced, the drive circuit may
be faulty. Replace the LEECV board.
5.5.17 System Error 1130: ATG DMA error

<Description>
DMA of the printed data cannot be completed.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEECV board
5-22
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.18 System Error 1140: Flash I/O error

<Description>
Writing the flash ROM is suspended by time-out, or deleting the flash ROM data
is suspended by time-out.
This error can be checked at the time of shutdown, during backup from the
operation panel, and when an error log is written.
<Faulty module>
(a) LEECV board
5.5.19 System Error 1150: Home position detection error

<Description>
Home position cannot be detected by moving the carriage. This error can be
checked when the printer is started or when the front cover is closed.
<Faulty module>
(a) Home position sensor
(b) JUN1 board
(c) Sensor cable CABLE(JUN-LEE)-ASSY
(d) LEECV board
(e) FFC cable FFC2-ASSY
(a) Enter the maintenance mode after starting the printer in fatal error neglect
mode (see 3.5). Go to the home position sensor from the SENSORS menu.
Check that "1" is displayed when the carriage is at the home position. Check
that the display changes by moving the carriage manually with the cap open
and the Y motor not excited. (In this case, remove the media and take care
not to drip ink.)
(b) Check the sensor cable and the FFC cable. Check whether the connector or
the harness is disconnected.
(c) Replace the home position sensor.
(d) Replace the sensor cable.
(e) Replace the JUN1 board.
(f) Replace the FFC cable.
(g) Replace the LEECV board.
5-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.20 System Error 1160: Wiping error

<Description>
The wiper does not turn once even after a specified time period has passed. This
error can be checked during the wiping operation.
<Faulty module>
(a) Wiping unit (including pump wipe motor and wiper switch)
(b) CABLE(SS-Motor)-ASSY
(c) JUN1 board
(d) FFC cable FFC2-ASSY
(e) LEECV board
Turn on the printer, and check in the initialization sequence whether the wiper
turns once, and the wiper switch detects the turn.
A. When the wiper does not turn
(a) If the wiper does not turn once even while the motor is rotating, check
whether the gear is not disengaged.
(b) If the motor does not turn, check whether +24V is generated on the LEECV
board by checking the LED38 lighting (lights up when 24V is being
generated) or by checking the TP364 voltage with a voltmeter. If the motor
does not work even when +24 V is generated, the pump wipe motor may be
faulty. Replace the wiping unit.
(c) Check CABLE(SS-Motor)-ASSY or the FFC cable.
(d) Replace the LEECV board as the motor drive circuit may also be faulty.
B. When the wiper is turning

(a) Check whether the wiper switch turns on or off with wiper turning.
Check whether the lever-type switch has come off.
(b) Check CABLE(SS-Motor)-ASSY or the FFC cable.
(c) Replace the LEECV board or the JUN1 board.
(d) If the error is not rectified, replace CABLE(SS-Motor)-ASSY or the FFC
cable.
5-24
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.21 System Error 1170: Ambient temperature error

<Description>
A temperature error has been detected by the ambient temperature thermistor
mounted in the printer. Abnormal temperature is below -10 degree C and over 85
degree C. This error is checked constantly.
<Faulty module>
(a) Ambient temperature sensor (AMB THRM ASSY)
(b) JUN1 board
(c) FFC cable FFC2-ASSY
(e) LEECV board
(a) When the ambient temperature is outside the range of -10 to 85 degree C,
install the printer in the operating temperature range.
(b) Replace the ambient temperature sensor.
(c) Check the FFC cable.
(d) Replace the LEECV board or the JUN1 board.
5.5.22 System Error 1180: Pump/wipe motor overcurrent

<Description>
Overcurrent has been detected in the pump/wipe motor drive circuit. This error
also occurs when the pump/wipe motor load is excessively heavy. This error is
checked constantly.
<Faulty module>
(a) Pump unit or wiping unit (including tube and pump/wipe motors)
(b) LEECV board
(c) CABLE(SS-Motor)-ASSY
(a) When the ambient temperature is low, the tube of pump motor unit becomes
hard, which increases the motor load. Use the printer within the operation
temperature range.
(b) Start the printer in fatal error neglect mode (see 3.5) to enter the maintenance
mode. Go to PUMP/WIPE from the MOTORS menu, and check that the
motor drive circuit and the motor are normal by setting PUMP ON and WIPE
ON.
(c) Replace the pump unit or the wiping unit if the motor does not rotate.
(d) Check CABLE(SS-Motor)-ASSY.
(e) Replace the LEECV board.
5-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.23 System Error 119X: Head drive voltage error

<Description>
The head drive voltages generated on the LEC4 board do not reach the
expected values. This error is checked during printing. X shows 0 to 5 (0=Y, 1=M,
2=C, 3=K, 4=Lm, 5=Lc voltage).
<Faulty module>
(a) Interlock switch
(b) LEC4 board
(c) LEECV board
(d) FFC cable FFC3 to 6 ASSY
(e) Power supply unit (LEP240F-36)
(f) Head cable
(g) Print head
Select VDD with the ELECT menu, and output specified voltages (15V/20V/25V),
and then check voltages on the test pins (TP) shown below on the LEC4 board.
Y head TP17 K head TP19
M head TP21 Lm head TP23
C head TP25 Lc head TP27
*Check the voltage of the test pins in the table for each location.
A. When none of these voltages is correct or output:

(a) Check whether the front cover is open slightly. Replace the interlock switch
and the cable.
(b) Replace the LEC4 board.
(c) Replace the LEECV board.
(d) Replace the power supply unit (LEP240F-36-S).
(e) Replace the FFC cable FFC3 to 6 ASSY.
B. When any of these voltages is incorrect or is not output:
(a) Replace the LEC4 board.
(b) Replace the head cable.
(c) Replace the print head.
5-26
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.24 System Error 11A0: EEPROM I/O error

<Description>
The EEPROM on the LEECV board cannot be read or written correctly.
<Faulty module>
(a) EEPROM
(b) LEECV board
(a) Replace the EEPROM (LEECV board, location: 4L).
5.5.25 System Error 11D0: Head cooling fan error

<Description>
The head temperature does not lower even after the head cooling fan rotates for
more than a specified time.
<Faulty module>
(a) Head cooling fan ASSY (FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY) HV
(b) Fan relay cable (CABLE(CarriageFan)-ASSY(CV))
(c) LEC4 board
(d) FFC cable FFC3 to 6-ASSY
(e) LEECV board
(a) Check whether any cable between the head cooling fan ASSY and the LEC
board is disconnected or damaged.
(b) Replace the head cooling fan ASSY (FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY) HV.
(c) Replace the fan relay cable (CABLE(CarriageFan(CV))-ASSY).
(d) Replace the LEC4 board.
(e) Replace the FFC cable FFC3 to 6 ASSY.
(f) Replace the LEECV board.
5-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.26 System Error 11E0: Long-time storage error

<Description>
When power off state continues for more than one month (31 days), the user
cannot restore normal operation, and this error is displayed.
This error cannot be rectified by normal power ON/OFF operation.
Error recovery method: Start the printer in error skip mode, enter the password,
and then initialize the internal error flag. However, since this is already an error
state, power off once (do not use the breaker) and then power on the printer
again to reset the error.
Perform the operation below before turning the printer on again.
(a) Replace the pump ASSY.
5.5.27 System Error 11F0: Y motor cooling fan failure

<Description>
Y motor cooling fan is not operating
<Faulty module>
(a) Y motor cooling fan
(b) LEECV board
(c) Sensor cable CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV)
(a) Start the printer in fatal error neglect mode to enter into the maintenance
mode.
Control the motor cooling fan from the motors menu and check whether a
operating sound is heard or the operation is normal.
(b) Replace Y motor cooling fan.
(c) Check the sensor cable.
(d) If the problem is not solved even after replacing the fan, there is a
possibility of a drive circuit failure. Replace the LEECV board.
5-28
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.28 System Error 120X: Head drive IC temperature error

<Description>
The temperature of the drive IC inside the head is unusual (below -10℃ or over
85℃). The x number corresponds to the following:
x Error part
0 Y head drive IC
1 M head drive IC
2 C head drive IC
3 K head drive IC
4 Lm head drive IC
5 Lc head drive IC
<Faulty module>
(b) LEC4 board
(c) Print head
(a) Reconnect the FFC cable (LEC4 board side and head side). Wipe off lightly
the stain on the cable terminal sections, if any.
(b) If the error is not rectified, replace the FFC cable.
(c) If the error is not rectified, replace theLEC4 board.
(d) If the error is not rectified, replace the print head.
5.5.29 System Error 1220: Edge sensor error

<Description>
Check the media width in the initialization sequence at printer power-on. At this
time, non-reflecting tape on the no media area of the platen adjusts the
sensitivity of the edge sensor. This error occurs when the desired sensitivity is
not attained by adjustment.
This error also occurs when media or foreign material is detected at the
checkpoint on the non-reflecting tape. This affects proper adjustment.
<Faulty module>
(a) SNS1 board
(b) CABLE(EdgeSensor)-ASSY
(c) LEC4 board
(d) FFC3-ASSY, FFC4-ASSY, FFC5-ASSY, FFC6-ASSY
(e) LEECV board
5-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(a) Start the printer in the fatal error neglect mode (CANCEL + MENU +
POWER) and enter the maintenance mode. Go to PRINTER SENSORS -
EDGE SENSOR from the SENSORS menu. It is considered to be OK when
the edge sensor detects the white paper inserted and removed under the
sensor.
(b) If the sensor does not function properly, check the connections between
SNS1 board, CABLE(EdgeSensor)-ASSY- LEC4 board, FFC, and LEECV
board for connector disconnection or continuity.
(c) Replace the SNS1 board.
(d) Replace the LEC4 board. (The level from the sensor is A/D converted on the
LEC4 board.)
5.5.30 System Error 126X: FFC error

<Description>
A carriage cable (FFC) connected to 0 (CN9), 1 (CN10), 2 (CN11), 3 (CN12) on
the LEECV board has been disconnected. If even one end of the 4 FFCs floats in
the connector area, the float detection lines assigned to both ends open and
generate an error. This error is checked during printing.
The x number corresponds to the following:
X LEC4/LEECV board connector FFC cable
0 CN9 FFC3-ASSY
1 CN10 FFC4-ASSY
2 CN11 FFC5-ASSY
3 CN12 FFC6-ASSY
<Faulty module>
(a) FFC3-ASSY, FFC4-ASSY, FFC5-ASSY, FFC6-ASSY
(b) LEC4 board
(c) LEECV board
(a) Reinsert the FFC cable. (LEC4 board side and LEECV board side)
(b) Check whether the FFC is damaged.
(e) If the error is not rectified, replace the FFC (0, 1, 2, 3).
5-30
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.31 System Error 1310: Cap sensor error

<Description>
The cap home position cannot be found.
<Faulty module>
(a) SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY
(b) JUN1 board
(c) FFC2-ASSY
(d) LEECV board
(a) Check the connection of SWITCH (CAP)-ASSY, FFC2-ASSY.
(b) Replace SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY.
(c) Replace the JUN1 board.
(d) Replace the FFC2-ASSY.
5.5.32 System Error 140X: Heater thermistor error

<Description>
The reading value of the heater thermistor is unusual. (below -20℃ or over
200℃)
x: 1 = after heater, 2= print heater, 3= preheater
<Faulty module>
(a) x heater (x: 1 = after heater, 2= print heater, 3= preheater)
(b) CABLE(PlatenThermistor)-ASSY
(c) CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV)
(d) LEECV board
(a) Check whether the x heater thermistor ASSY, the CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV),
and the LEECV board are connected properly or whether a cable is not
disconnected or damaged.
(b) Replace the x heater (when x: 1 = after heater, 3= preheater)
Replace the CABLE(PlatenThermistor)-ASSY. (when x: 2= print heater)
(c) Replace the CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV)
(d) Replace the LEECV board.
5-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.33 System Error 141X: Heater error (High temperature)

<Description>
The temperature thermistor of the x heater has detected the temperature over
65℃.
<Faulty module>
(b) CABLE(PlatenThermistor)-ASSY
(c) CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV)
(d) LEECV board
(a) If the equipment is in a high temperature environment, move it to an
environment within the operating temperature range.
(b)Check whether the x heater thermistor ASSY, the CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV),
and the LEECV board are connected properly or whether a cable is not
disconnected or damaged.
(c) Replace the x heater (when x: 1 = after heater, 3= preheater)
Replace the CABLE(PlatenThermistor)-ASSY. (when x: 2= print heater)
(d) Replace the CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV)
5-32
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.34 System Error 143X: Heater error (Low temperature)

<Description>
After 30 minutes running, x heater temperature does not reach the preset level.
<Faulty module>
(b) CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV), CABLE(HeaterSwitch)-ASSY,
CABLE(TRC-CTL)-ASSY, CABLE (PlatenThermistor)-ASSY
(c) TRC-CV board
(d) LEECV board
(a) If the equipment is in a low temperature environment, move it to the
environment within the operating temperature range.
(b) Check whether the heater voltage changeover switch corresponds to the AC
voltage.
Used AC voltage Heater switch setting
100 to 127V 120V

220 to 240V 240V
(c) Check whether the x heater thermistor, CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV), and the

LEECV board are connected properly.
(d) Replace the TRC-CV board.
(e) Replace the x heater (when x:1 = after heater, 3= preheater)
Replace CABLE(PlatenThermistor)-ASSY. (when x: 2= print heater)
(f) Replace CABLE(Sensor)-ASSY(CV)
(g) Replace the LEECV board.
5-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.35 System error 144x: Heater error (No interruption)

<Description>
The heater sequence does not interrupt.
<Faulty module>
(a) TRC-CV board
(b) CABLE(TRC-CTR)-ASSY
(c) LEECV board
(a) Check whether the TRC-CV board and the CABLE(TRC-CTR)-ASSY are
connected properly.
(b) Replace the TRC-CV board.
(c) Replace the CABLE(TRC-CTR)-ASSY.
(d) Replace the LEECV board.
5-34
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.36 System error 150X: Head thermistor error

<Description>
The head thermistor value is less than -15℃ or more than 95℃.
The x number corresponds to the following.
x Head
1 Y head
2 M head
3 C head
4 K head
5 Lm head
6 Lc head
<Faulty module>
(a) FFC(LEC-HEAD) (head cable)
(b) Print head
(c) PCB-ASSY-LEC4
(a) Reinsert the FFC (PCB-ASSY-LEC4 side and print head side). If the cable
terminal is dirty, clean it softly with a soft cloth or paper moistened with
ethanol.
Check whether the FFC cable is damaged by looking at the followings
(1) The terminal part coming off from the base
(2) The green part being cut out due to rubbing
If damaged, replace the FFC.
(b) Determine if the error is due to the print head or other cause.
Cross over the FFC between the print head causing the error and a normal
print head.
Check the error number. If the number changed to the newly connected head,
the error is caused by the print head. Replace the head.
If the error number does not change, the error is due to other cause.
(c) Replace the PCB-ASSY-LEC4 board.
5-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.5.37 System error 160X: Head heater error (High temperature)

<Description>
The head heater thermistor value is more than 45℃.
x Head
1 Y head
2 M head
3 C head
4 K head
5 Lm head
6 Lc head
<Faulty module>
(b) CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV)
(c) Print head
(d) HEAD-HEATER-ASSY
(e) PCB-ASSY-LEC4
Reinsert the FFC (PCB-ASSY-LEC4 side and print head side). If the cable
ethanol.
Check that the CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV) connector is connected to
the HEAD-HEATER-ASSY.
the PCB-ASSY-LEC4.
Check that there in no disconnection with the HEAD-HEATER-ASSY.
If any, replace the CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV).
(c) Determine if the error is due to the print head or other cause.
Cross over the CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV) between the print head
causing the error and a normal print head.
5-36
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(d) Replace the HEAD-HEATER-ASSY board. (Be careful not to lose the screws
and spacers.)
(e) Replace the PCB-ASSY-LEC4 board.
5.5.38 System error 161X: Head heater error (Target temperature not
reached)
<Description>
The head heater does not reach the target temperature even after 15 minutes.
x Head
1 Y head
2 M head
3 C head
4 K head
5 Lm head
6 Lc head
<Faulty module>
(c) Print head
(e) PCB-ASSY-LEC4
Reinsert the FFC (PCB-ASSY-LEC4 side and print head side). If the cable
ethanol.
the HEAD-HEATER-ASSY.
the PCB-ASSY-LEC4.
Check that there in no disconnection with the HEAD-HEATER-ASSY.
If any, replace the CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV).
5-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(c) Determine if the error is due to the print head or other cause.
Cross over the CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV) between the print head
causing the error and a normal print head.
Check that the heat-conduction sheet (SHEET(HEAD-HEATER)) installed on
the HEAD-HEATER-ASSY is closely attached to the print head.
Replace the board if the problem appears even when the sheet is closely
attached. (In this case, be careful not to lose the screws and spacers.)
(e) Replace the PCB-ASSY-LEC4 board.
5.5.39 System error 2000-6000

<Description>
A logic error has occurred in the firmware program.
<Faulty module>
(a) Firmware program
(b) LEECV board
(a) Update the firmware program to the latest version.
5-38
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.6 Firmware Program Upgrade
5.6.1 Upgrading from CF

This is a function of the boot program.
The following shows the upgrading procedure.
(1) Turn the printer off.
(2) Insert the CF card for firmware upgrade into the CF socket on the LEE board.
(3) Set the DSW to the left of the CF socket.
DSW1 ON (up): Upgrade system program
DSW2 ON (up): Upgrade boot program
NOTE: DSW1 and DSW2 can be set ON at the same time.
DSW
(4) Turn the printer on. UP: ON
DOWN: OFF CF socket
(5) After the version-up is completed, turn the power off.
(6) Turn OFF both DSW1 and 2 at the left side of the
CF socket.
(7) Remove the CF card.
(8) Turn the printer on.
<Indication of system program upgrade>
READING SYSTEM XXX:Up counter
XXX/64
READING SYSTEM
DONE
UPGRADING SYSTEM XXX:Up counter
ERASING XX/63
VERIFYING XX/63
XXX:Up counter
UPGRADING SYSTEM
WRITING XX/63
5-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
VERIFYING XX/63
SYSTEM IS VALID
RESTART
<Indication of boot program upgrade>
XXX:Up counter
READING SYSTEM
XXX/64
READING SYSTEM
DONE
UPGRADING BOOT XXX:Up counter
ERASING XX/08
UPGRAGING BOOT XXX:Up counter
VERIFYING XX/08
WRITING XX/08
VERIFYING XX/08
SYSTEM IS VALID XXX:Up counter
RESTART
5-40
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
<Error indication>
When an error occurs, the printer can no longer continue processing. If an error occurs, the
causes are as follows:
(a) Malfunction of the CF card : Replacement
(b) Malfunction of the LEECV board : Replacement
CF detect error
UPGRADING
CF DETECT ERROR
Memory alloc error
UPGRADING
MEMORY ALLOC ERROR
File read error
UPGRADING
FILE READ ERROR
Illegal file error
UPGRADING
ILLEGAL FILE ERROR
Sum error
UPGRADING
SUM ERROR
Erase error
UPGRADING
ERASE ERROR
Write error
UPGRADING
WRITE ERROR
5-41
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Erase verify error
UPGRADING
ERASE VERIRY ERROR
Write verify error
UPGRADING
WRITE VERIRY ERROR
5.6.2 Online Upgrading

Execute PRINTER FW UPGRADE in the SETUP menu.
#PRINTER FW UPGRADE
>
key
#PRINTER FW UPGRADE
*OK?
Press key to start or to cancel upgrading.
PREPARING
PLEASE WAIT
Waiting for data reception
UPGRADE READY
PLEASE SEND DATA
Execute FWUpdate.exe and press Update on the PC.
Data receiving
RECEIVING DATA
PLEASE WAIT
5-42
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Data reception completed
COMPLETE RECEIVE
Erasing
UPGRADE EXECUTING
ERASING XX/XX
Writing
UPGRADE EXECUTING
WRITING XX/XX
Verifying
UPGRADE EXECUTING
VERIFYING XX/XX
Normal end
UPGRADE FINISHED
RESTART
Cancel
CANCEL UPGRADE
RESTART
Abnormal end (error)
UPGRADE FAILED XXXX

RESTART
XXXX: Error code

- 0002 : Data size error (excessively large)
- 0003 : Data size error (excessively small)
- 0004 : Invalid data
- 0005 : CRC error
- 0006 : Write error
- 0007 : Verify error
- 0008 : USB cable disconnect error
- 0009 : Protocol error
5-43
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.7 Upload/download
You can run the CP_Manager software installed on a PC to upload and download various types
of information with the printer.
5.7.1 Upload
You can use a tool installed on your PC to upload information.
See the CP_Manager user's manual when you use it.
5.7.2 Download
You can use a tool installed on your PC to download information.
See the CP_Manager user's manual when you use it.
5-44
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.8 Settings when Replacing Engine Board (LEECV)

(1) When EEPROM is normal (engine board only is faulty)
When EEPROM on the current board can be mounted on the new board, perform the
following steps.
(a) Remove the EEPROM on the current board and mount it on the new engine
board, and then replace the engine board.
・If necessary, rewrite the engine firmware program.
(b) Turn the printer on.
(c) Perform the following of the SETUP menu in the maintenance mode on the
operation panel.
- SAVE CALIBS : Saves EEPROM data in the factory default
setting area of the flash memory.
- SAVE EEPROM : Saves EEPROM data in the backup area of
the flash memory.
For the workflow and management of engine's system information saved in the
EEPROM or flash memory, see 3.7 Management of System Information.
(2) When replacing EEPROM (EEPROM only is faulty)

To mount a new EEPROM on the current engine board, perform the following steps.
(a) Mount a new EEPROM on the current engine board.
- If necessary, rewrite the engine firmware program.
(b) Turn the printer on.
- The printer starts up with an EEPROM error (1109) because the EEPROM is
not initialized.
- The EEPROM data is restored from the system backup data on the board
during the firmware recovery process.
(c) Turn the printer off and then on again.
- If EEPROM error 1109 still remains, the backup data is broken. Start the printer
with the POC skip mode (CANCEL + power on) and perform RESTORE
CALIBS of the SETUP menu.
(d) Restart the printer.
(3) When replacing EEPROM and engine board (EEPROM and engine board are faulty)
When the EEPROM and engine board are replaced at the same time, print distance and
other counter data, and mechanism adjustment parameters are lost. To avoid this, perform
the steps of (1) or (2) above to make the EEPROM data or the data in the flash ROM
backup area available. If the engine's system information is not available, perform the
following steps.
5-45
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(a) Install a new engine board.

- If necessary, rewrite the engine firmware program.
(b) Skip POC and start the printer.
- Pressing CANCEL key and POWER switch on the operation panel at the same
time starts the printer while skipping POC.
- The printer starts up with EEPROM error because the EEPROM is not
initialized, and the panel guidance is displayed in English.
(c) Perform the following in the SETUP menu in the maintenance mode on the
operation panel.
- INIT EEPROM : Initializes the EEPROM.
- DATE (YY/MM/DD) : Set year, month, and day.
- SYSTEM TIME : Set system time (hour/minute/second).
- SERIAL No. : Set serial number of the printer.
Select DONE for INK CHARGE DONE of the PH.MAIN menu.
(d) Restart the printer.
(e) Enter adjustment values for mechanism adjustment or head adjustment.
<When record is remaining>

When ADJUST parameter record of the engine remains, no adjustment is
required. Enter adjustment values for mechanism adjustment or head
adjustment.
<When no record is remaining>

Perform mechanism adjustment and head adjustment, and then enter the
adjustment values.
<Adjustment values for mechanism and head adjustments>

- Correcting the cap position : See section 7.5.
- CAPPING-UNIT-CV Cam Position Adjustment
: See section 7.4.
- Correcting wiping position : See section 7.6.
- Nozzle position adjustment : See User's Guide.
- Head position adjustment (main scan direction)
: See User's Guide.
- Bidirectional adjustment : See User's Guide.
- Media advance adjustment : See User's Guide.
- Sensor adjustment (top) : See User's Guide.
- Sensor adjustment (side) : See User's Guide.
- Head R/L adjustment : See User's Guide.
5-46
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(f) Perform the following in the SETUP menu in the maintenance mode on the
operation panel.
- SAVE CALIBS : Saves EEPROM data in the factory default
setting area of the flash memory.
- SAVE EEPROM : Saves EEPROM data in the backup area of the
flash memory.
(g) Restart the printer
Notes
- When replacing the LEECV board, turn off power without executing fill cap because a
newly installed LEECV board is based on the premise that it activates without fill cap.
- After replacing the LEECV board, upgrade to the latest F/W version.
5.9 No Error Message Appears
5.9.1 No display
Booting up... is displayed during initialization of the system program.
If this message does not appear, perform the following.
- Check whether the operation panel functions normally.
- Write the boot program and system program.
- Replace the LEECV board.
5-47
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5.10 Replacing the Battery (LEECV Board)
<Symptom>
Date and time function does not operate properly even after configuring the time
zone setting.
<Faulty module>
(a) Battery (for real-time clock RX-8564CF)
(b) LEECV board
(a) Replace the lithium battery (U00097942400) at BT1.
Notes
- When replacing the lithium battery, do not install another type of lithium battery as it may
result in an explosion. Always check the battery type when replacing the lithium battery.
- Dispose of the faulty lithium battery according to the relevant regulations.
5-48
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 6 Replacement of Parts
SECTION 6 REPLACEMENT OF PARTS

(DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY)
This section describes disassembly and reassembly procedures when replacing parts of the
printer.
6.1 Rules for Disassembly and Reassembly Procedures
The following explains rules for parts replacement (disassembly/reassembly) procedures.
[Disassembly] :Shows a disassembling procedure.

The number in parentheses ( ) shows the number of screws or connectors to be removed or
disconnected.
[Reassembly] :Shows a reassembly procedure.

However, only notes are described here as reassembly of parts is possible by reversing steps
of disassembly.
Note
Memorize or note down the state before disassembly for easy assembling after parts
replacement.
6-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.2 Parts Name
6.2.1 Names and Layout of Parts

(11) (13)
(2)
(1)
(6) (5)
(4)
(12)
(8)
(3)
(10) (7)
(22) (19)
(9)
(17)
(19)
(10)
(17) (20)
(16)
(18) (15)
(10) (14)
(21)
(1) COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV (13) COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV

COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT COVER-Y-RAIL-CV54
(2) COVER(FU-L)ASSY-CV (14) COVER(INK-CART)-CV
(3) COVER(FB-L)ASSY-CV (15) COVER(R-L)
(4) COVER(FU-R)ASSY-CV (16) COVER(PINCH-U)64-CV
COVER-PINCH-D-CV54
(5) COVER(FB-R)ASSY-CV (17) PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT
(6) COVER(SIDE-L-CV)-ASSY (18) PAPER-GUIDE-FEEDING64-CV-ASSY
PAPER-GUIDE-FEED-CV54-UNIT
(7) COVER(SIDE-R-CV)-ASSY (19) COVER(BASE-REAR)
(8) PANEL-ASSY-CV (20) COVER(PINCH-U)64
COVER-PINCH-U-CV54
(9) COVER(TOOL-BOX)-CV (21) BLOWER UNIT(OPTION)
(10) COVER(FRD)-CV (22) TAKE-UP REEL UNIT
(11) COVER(PCB)-CV
(12) COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV
Note: The names of IP-5520 (54 inch) parts are written below the names for IP-5620.
Figure 6.1 Name of each part of printer exterior
6-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3 Disassembling and Reassembling Exterior Parts
6.3.1 COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV, COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT

The COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT with the IP-5520.
[Disassembly]
1. Open COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV and

loosen the slide stopper one screw of COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV
the right hinge.
Slide stopper screw
2. Slide the screw to the left, retract the

pin, and detach
COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV slightly
from the right STOPPER(COVER-F).
Note Right STOPPER(COVER-F)

Move COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV slightly
to prevent damage to the left hinge.
3. Remove COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV
Left STOPPER(COVER-F)
from the left STOPPER(COVER-F) to
the right.
COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV
6-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.2 COVER(FU)-CV, COVER(FB)-CV, COVER(COVER-FU)-CV,

COVER(COVER-FB)-CV
The COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT with the IP-5520.
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV
(see 6.3.1).
2. Open all these covers and unscrew the COVER(COVER-FU)-CV

screws (two for each) fixing the
STOPPER(COVER-F) (one on each
side) to remove the covers.
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV
Right STOPPER
(COVER-F)
Note
COVER(FU)-CV
Adjust the angles of COVER(FU)-CV
and COVER(COVER-FU)-CV to make
enough room for a screwdriver.
COVER(FB)-CV
Left STOPPER(COVER-F)
6-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.3 COVER(PCB)-CV, COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV

[Disassembly]
1. When COVER(FU)-CV and

COVER(FB)-CV, or
COVER(COVER-FU)-CV, or
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV on the same
side as COVER(PCB)-CV or
COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV to be detached
is not removed, open the covers
(see 6.3.2).
COVER(PCB)-CV
2. Unscrew the screws
(COVER(PCB)-CV: four screws,
COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV: five screws)
fixing COVER(PCB)-CV or
COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV to remove
COVER(PCB)-CV or
COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV.
COVER(PCB)-CV
COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV
COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV
6-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.4 COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV, COVER-Y-RAIL-CV54

With IP-5520 COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV is called COVER-Y-RAIL-CV54,
and COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FONT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
1. Open COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV
when it is attached (see 6.3.1).
2. Remove the screws securing the

COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV (IP-5620: eight,
IP-5520: seven) and remove the
COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV.
COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV
COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV
6.3.5 COVER(SIDE-L)-CV, COVER(SIDE-R)-CV

[Disassembly]
1. Unscrew the screws (four for each) COVER(SIDE-L)-CV

securing the inside
COVER(SIDE-L)-CV and
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV.
6-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV
Note
Half of the two screws inside
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV are under PANEL-ASSY(LV3)
PANEL-ASSY(LV3).
2. Unscrew the five screws of the outside

COVER(SIDE-L)-CV and the four COVER(SIDE-L)-CV
screws of the outside
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV to detach these
covers.
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV
6-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.6 PANEL-ASSY-CV
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(SIDE-R)-CV
(see 6.3.5).
2. Unscrew the three screws of

PANEL-ASSY-CV to remove it.
PANEL-ASSY-CV
Note
Caution is required since the
PANEL-ASSY-CV cable is connected.
3. Remove the PANEL-ASSY-CV cable

from the connector on PCB-ASSY-MCP4
PCB-ASSY-MCP4.
Connector
6-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.7 COVER(TOOL-BOX)-CV
[Disassembly]
(see 6.3.5).

COVER(TOOL-BOX)-CV to remove it.
COVER(TOOL-BOX)-CV
6.3.8 COVER(FRD)-CV
[Disassembly]
1. Unscrew the two screws of

COVER(FRD)-CV to detach it. COVER(FRD)-CV
COVER(FRD)-CV
6-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.9 COVER(INK-CART)-CV
[Disassembly]

COVER(INK-CART)-CV to detach it. COVER(INK-CART)-CV
COVER(INK-CART)-CV
6.3.10 COVER(R-L)
[Disassembly]
1. Unscrew the four screws of

COVER(R-L) to detach it.
COVER(R-L)
6-10
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.11 COVER(PINCH-D)
[Disassembly]
1. Unscrew the screws (IP-5620: nine,

IP-5520: eight) of
COVER(PINCH-D)64 to detach it.
COVER(PINCH-D)64
COVER(PINCH-D)64
6 - 11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.12 SWITCH(Interlock)-ASSY, SWITCH(COVER)-ASSY

With IP-5520, COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly] (Same procedure for symmetrical units)
1. Open COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV (see

6.3.1) and unscrew the one screw of
COVER(SENSOR-R) or
COVER(SENSOR-L) to detach one of
them.
COVER(SENSOR-R)
COVER(SENSOR-L)
2. Disconnect the SWITCH Connector

(Interlock)-ASSY cable and the
intermediate connector of
SWITCH(COVER)-ASSY cable.
Remove them from the cable clamps
(two locations).
Cable clamps
Left side
SWITCH(COVER)-ASSY
SWITCH(Interlock)-ASSY
3. Unscrew the two screws securing
SWITCH(Interlock)-ASSY and
SWITCH (COVER)ASSY together to
remove them.
SPACER(SENSOR)
Note
The SPACER (SENSOR) on the back of Right side
SWITCH(Interlock)-ASSY also comes off. SPACER(SENSOR)
Be careful not to lose it. SWITCH(Interlock)-ASSY
6-12
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.13 Photo sensor LG248NL1

With IP-5520, PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY is called
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT,
and COVER(FRONT)ASSY is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
(see 6.3.1) and remove
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-AS
SY (see 6.11.1).
2. Lower LEVER(PINCH-FRONT)MT,
Hooks
release the two hooks, and disconnect
the one connector to remove Photo Photo sensor LG248NL1
sensor LG248NL1.
LEVER(PINCH-FRONT)MT
Connector
6.3.14 PCB-ASSY-MCP4
With IP-5520, COVER(FRONT)ASSY is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV,
COVER(FU)-CV, COVER(FB)-CV,
COVER(INK-CART)-CV,
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV, and
PANEL-ASSY-CV (see 6.3).
2. Unscrew the 10 screws of PCB-ASSY-MCP4

PCB-ASSY-MCP4 from inside
PANEL-ASSY-CV, and remove
PCB-ASSY-MCP4.
6-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.15 CASE(CUTTER), SLIDER(CUTTER)

With IP-5520, FRAME(CUTTER)64 is called FRAME-CUTTER-CV54,
and FRAME-ASSY64 is called FRAME-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
1. Pull the levers on both sides of the Levers

CASE(CUTTER) and remove the
CASE(CUTTER)
CASE(CUTTER) from the
SLIDER(CUTTER).
2. Remove the eight screws fixing the

FRAME(CUTTER)64 to the
FRAME-ASSY64 and remove the
FRAME(CUTTER)64.
3. Remove the one screw fixing the

right/left JURACON SPACER to the
FRAME(CUTTER)64 and remove the
JURACON SPACER.
4. Slide the SLIDER(CUTTER) and

remove it from the
FRAME(CUTTER)64.
FRAME(CUTTER)64
FRAME(CUTTER)64
FRAME-ASSY64
JURACON SPACER
SLIDER(CUTTER)
FRAME(CUTTER)64
6-14
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.3.16 PAPER-GUIDE
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT → (see 6.11.1)
PAPER-GUIDE-FEEDING64-CV-ASSY
PAPER-GUIDE-FEED-CV54-UNIT → (see 6.11.2)
6-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4 Disassembling and Reassembling Y Driver
6.4.1 Photo sensor LG248NL1

With IP-5520, COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV is called COVER-Y-RAIL-CV54,
and COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
COVER(COVER-FU)-CV,
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV, and
COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV (see 6.3).
2. Lower CAPPING-UNIT-CV and move

the carriage to the left.
Carriage
3. Release the two hooks, and

disconnect the one connector to
remove Photo sensor LG248NL1.
Photo sensor
Connector
LG248NL1
Note
After Photo sensor LG248NL1 is
replaced, check the CAPPING-UNIT-CV
position and adjust the cap position if Hooks
necessary.
Y-RAIL-UNIT
Photo sensor
LG248NL1
6-16
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4.2 Y-MOTOR-ASSY, PULLY(Y-MOTOR), Bearing FR188ZZ,

THERMISTOR(Y-MOTOR)-TX
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(SIDE-L)-CV,
COVER(COVER-FU)-CV, and
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV (see 6.3).
2. Remove the connectors for the cables

of the parts to be removed.
Y-MOTOR-ASSY
connector
3. Unscrew the four screws of

PANEL(Y-MOTOR) and loosen Timing
belt tension.
4. Remove the two screws fixing the

Y-MOTOR-ASSY to the
PANEL(Y-MOTOR) and pull out the
Timing belt to remove the
Y-MOTOR-ASSY.
Timingbelt
Y-MOTOR-ASSY
6-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Remove Bearing FR188ZZ from

PANEL(Y-MOTOR). PANEL(Y-MOTOR) Bearing FR188ZZ
Notes for installation
- Screw tightening torque to secure the

motor to PANEL(Y-MOTOR): 14kgfcm,
137.34N/cm
- Apply grease (Dow Corning Asia
EM-60L) to Timing belt.
- Adjust the Timing belt tension
(see 7.3).
6-18
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4.3 Driving Pulley Assy, Timing belt

With IP-5520, BELT(SUS)64 is called BELT-SUS-CV54.
[Disassembly]
1. 1. Remove COVER(INK-CART)-CV,
COVER(SIDE-L)-CV,
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV, COVER(FU)-CV,
and COVER(FB)-CV (see 6.3).
2. Loosen the screw of Following

movement Pulley Assy (see 6.3), and
then loosen the BELT(SUS)64 tension.
Carriage
3. Unscrew one of the screws of
BELT(SUS)64 in the carriage, and BELT(SUS)64
loosen BELT(SUS)64 (see 6.4.4).
4. Remove Y-MOTOR-ASSY (see 6.4.2)

to free Timing belt.
BELT(SUS)64 screw
5. Slide Driving Pulley Assy to the left.

When the Driving Pulley Assy shaft
comes out of HOLDER(PULLEY)L, Shaft
remove Driving Pulley Assy downward.
HOLDER(PULLEY)L
Driving Pulley
6. Remove Timing belt from Driving
Pulley Assy.
BELT(SUS)64
Timing belt

- Adjust the BELT(SUS)64 tension (see 7.2).
- Apply grease (Dow Corning Asia EM-60L) to Timing belt.
- Adjust the Timing belt tension (see 7.3).
6-19
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4.4 BELT(SUS)
With IP-5520, BELT(SUS)64 is called BELT-SUS-CV54, COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV is called
COVER-Y-RAIL-CV54, and COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(INK-CART)-CV,
COVER(SIDE-L) -CV,
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV, COVER(FU)-CV,
and COVER(FB)-CV (see 6.3).
2. Open COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV,
3. Loosen the screw of Following Carriage

movement Pulley Assy, and then
loosen the BELT(SUS)64 tension (see BELT(SUS)64
6.4.4).
4. Unscrew the screws (two screws on

both sides) fixing BELT(SUS)64 in the
carriage area and loosen
BELT(SUS)64.
BELT(SUS)64 screw
5. Slide Driving Pulley Assy to the left.

When the shaft of Driving Pulley Assy
is pulled out from HOLDER(PULLEY)L,
Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV hole
bring Driving Pulley Assy and the
Timing belt down to remove them (see
6.4.3).
6. Pull out BELT(SUS)64 through the

hole in Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV.
BELT(SUS)64
Note
Cover the hole in one end of
BELT(SUS)64 (on Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV
hole side) and the stepped portion with
adhesive tape to prevent dropping by
hooking it to Y-RAIL UNIT64-CV hole.
Stepped portion of
BELT(SUS)64
6-20
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Note for installation

Pass the SUS belt installation jig through
the hole of the Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV, with Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV hole
the slot side turned up.
Note
- Assemble the SUS belt installation jig.
(See the next page.)
SUS belt installation jig
Put the metal measuring tape through

the slot of SUS belt installation jig
SUS belt installation jig
Attach the end of the BELT(SUS)64 to

the tip of the metal measuring tape with
adhesive tape and pull the metal
measuring tape to let the BELT(SUS)64
through.
BELT(SUS)64
Pull out the SUS belt installation jig

through the hole of the
Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV.
Adjust BELT(SUS)64 tension (see 7.2)
Note BELT(SUS)64
When the SUS belt installation jig is not

used, pass the metal measuring tape
through the Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV hole.
Attach the BELT(SUS)64 to the metal
measuring tape with adhesive tape and
pull the measuring tape to let the
BELT(SUS)64 through. Pull out the tape
while applying proper tension to prevent
the BELT(SUS)64 rubbing against the
hole plate edge of the
Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV.
6-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
- Assembling SUS belt installation jig
Sheet metal 1 (5) Sheet metal 2 (2) Screw Sheet

(short) metal 2
Sheet metal 1 (5) Sheet metal 2 (2)
Screw (short) (6)
Screw Sheet Screw
Screw (long) (24) metal 1 (short)
Sheet metal 3 (6) Screw (short) (6) (short)
Screw (long) (24)

Screw SheetScrew
Sheet metal 3 (6)
(short) metal (short)
1
Sheet metal 4
Sheet metal 4 (6)
Screw Screw
Sheet Sheet metal 4
(short) (short)
Sheet metal 4 (6) metal 1 Sheet metal 4
Screw
Sheet Screw Sheet metal 4
(short)
metal 1 (short) Sheet metal 4
Screw Screw
Sheet Sheet metal 4
(short) (short)
metal 1 Sheet metal 4
Screw
Sheet Screw
Sheet metal 4 (long)
metal 2 (short)
Sheet metal 4
Screw
Screw
(long)
Sheet metal 4 (long)
Sheet
Sheet metal 4 Screw Screw metal 3
(long) (long)
Sheet metal 4 Sheet
Screw Screw metal 3
(long) (long)
Sheet
Screw Screw metal 3
(long) (long)
Sheet
Screw Screw metal 3
(long) (long)
Sheet
Screw Screw metal 3
(long) (long)
Sheet
Screw
metal 3
(long)
6-22
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4.5 Following movement Pulley Assy

With IP-5520, BELT(SUS)64 is called BELT-SUS-CV54,
and COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(INK-CART)-CV, and

COVER(SIDE-R)-CV (see 6.3).
3. Loosen the BELT(SUS)64 tension

adjustment screws of Following Following movement Pulley
movement Pulley Assy to loosen the
BELT(SUS)64 tension. BELT(SUS)64
BELT(SUS)64 tension adjustment screws
4. Unscrew the screw (on one side) fixing

BELT(SUS)64 in the carriage area, Carriage
loosen BELT(SUS)64 further, and
remove it from Following movement
Pulley Assy. BELT(SUS)64
Note
Do not scratch BELT(SUS)64.
BELT(SUS)64 screw
5. Detach Following movement Pulley
Assy.

Adjust the BELT(SUS)64 tension (see
7.2).
6-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4.6 ROLLER(PINCH)
With IP-5520, COVER(PINCH-D)64 is called COVER-PINCH-D-CV54.
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(PINCH-D)64
(see 6.3.11).
2. Raise LEVER(PINCH-REAR) and

keep it at the position. LEVER(PINCH-REAR)
COVER(PINCH-D)64
3. Remove Spring(Pinch-Side)2 (two per

unit) and Spring(Pinch-Center)1 (one Hooks
per unit) from the hooks of HOLDER(PINCH)
HOLDER(PINCH) and ARM(PINCH).
ARM(PINCH)
Hooks Spring(Pinch-Side)
4. Pull ARM(PINCH) from the front side

and release the hooks. Then remove HOLDER(PINCH) Hooks
ROLLER(PINCH)EX by releasing it
from the ARM(PINCH) hooks.
ROLLER(PINCH)EX
ARM(PINCH)
ROLLER(PINCH)EX
ARM(PINCH) Hooks
6-24
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4.7 T-FENCE
With IP-5520, T-FENCE-LV64 is called T-FENCE-LV54, COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV is called
COVER-Y-RAIL-CV54, COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT,
HOLDER(T-FENCE) (14) is called HOLDER(T-FENCE) (10 ), and RAIL(Y)64 is called
MAIN-PLATE-Y-RAIL-CV54.
[Disassembly]
COVER(COVER-FU)-CV,
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV,
COVER(SIDE-L)-CV,
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV,
COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV,
COVER(PCB)LV3, and
COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV (see 6.3).
2. Remove Spring(T-FENCE) on both

sides of T-FENCE-LV64.
Spring(T-FENCE)
T-FENCE-LV64
3. Remove HOLDER(T-FENCE) (14).
HOLDER(T-FENCE)
CABLE(Y-Encoder)-ASSY
4. Then, remove T-FENCE-LV64 from
CABLE(Y-Encoder)-ASSY (right side
of the carriage) by pulling it out.
T-FENCE-LV64
6-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
[Reassembly]
1. Install the HOLDER(T-FENCE) only on

the front side.
2. Put the T-FENCE-LV64 and hook the

spring to install the Spring(T-FENCE).
Note
Install the T-FENCE-LV64 by positioning
the edge with the red line on the Y
motor’s side. There is no difference
between the upper and lower faces.
3. Install the HOLDER(T-FENCE) (on the

back side) in the area A.
Clip the T-FENCE-LV64 to fix it (so that
the T-FENCE-LV64 does not move).
Be sure that the T-FENCE-LV64 is not
lifted from the surface of the RAIL(Y)64.
4. Install HOLDER(T-FENCE) (IP-5620:

six locations, IP-5520: four locations) Coated paper
on the back side in the area B.
Clip one sheet of coated paper in the
T-FENCE-LV64 and install it. After
fixing it, remove the coated paper. T-FENCE-LV64
Check that the T-FENCE-LV64 slides
correctly.
6-26
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4.8 CABLE (FFC3-ASSY, FFC4-ASSY, FFC5-ASSY,

FFC6-ASSY)
With IP-5520, COVER(PINCH-D)64 is called COVER-PINCH-D-CV54, COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV is called
COVER-Y-RAIL-CV54, COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT,
PAPER-GUIDE-FEEDING64-CV-ASSY is called PAPER-GUIDE-FEED-CV54-UNIT,
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY is called PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT,
Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV is called Y-RAIL-UNIT, STAY(FFC)FRONT-SIDE-64-CV is called
STAY-FFC-FS-CV54, STAY(FFC)BackSide64 is called STAY-FFC-BS-CV54,
STAY(FFC)BackSide64 is called STAY-FFC-BS-CV54, and T-FENCE-LV64 is called
T-FENCE-LV54.
[Disassembly]
1. Turn off power, and remove

COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV,
COVER(COVER-FU)-CV,
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV,
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV,
COVER(PCB)-CV,
COVER(Y-RAIL)S-CV, and
COVER(Y-RAIL)-CV (See 6.3).
2. Insert your hand in the right side of the

CAPPING-UNIT, rotate the motor
pinion with your fingers in the direction
Motor pinion
of the arrow, and open the head cap to
make the carriage move.
3. Remove COVER(PINCH-D)64 (see

6.3.11).
4. Remove
(see 6.11.2).
5. Open Controller box (see 6.6).

PCB-ASSY-LEECV
6. Remove the six FFC cables from
PCB-ASSY-LEECV (connectors at six
locations).

Precaution for assembly: Do not confuse
Connector
the sequence for connecting FFC cables.
Match the connector numbers (CN7 to
12 from the front) and the last number
printed at the end of the cables.
6-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Disconnect each cable from FLAT

CABLE CLIP (three locations) that is IP-5620
fixing the cable.
FLAT CABLE CLIP
IP-5520
FLAT CABLE CLIP
8. Pull six FFC cables and remove the

fixing brackets on them.
Fixing brackets
9. Remove COVER(INK-CART)-CV (see

6.3.9).
10. Unscrew the four screws (two of them

at PLATE(RIGHT)OuterSide have an
inner clip washer) fixing the
STAY(HANDLE-R) to remove
STAY(HANDLE-R).
STAY(HANDLE-R)
STAY(HANDLE-R)
6-28
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
11. Disconnect the Photo sensor Photo sensor LG248NL1 connector

LG248NL1 connector.
12. Open the clamp and remove the ink

tube and harness.
Clamp
13. Disconnect the three connectors and

remove the two FFC cables from Connector
PCB-ASSY-JUN1 on
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV.
Note
When unscrewing the upper screws,
keep the installation point of them in
mind.
FFC CABLE
14. Among the four screws fixing

INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV, unscrew the lower
two screws, and loosen the upper two
screws to bring INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
down.
Note
With the 4 color specifications printer, the
two ink cartridge slots to the left are
closed with plates.
15. Cover the tip of the needles inside

INK-BOX-UNIT-CV with the tube used
for packaging to avoid spilling of ink.
6-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
16. Remove the tip of the six tubes in

INK-BOX-UNIT-CV (two screws for INK-BOX-UNIT
each).
17. Pull four FFC cables going to the

carriage through the eyehole in
PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide and bundle FFC CABLE
them.
Eyehole
18. Move the carriage to the upper side of

SY and open COVER-CARRIAGE
forward.
Note
Put a mat around
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY COVER(CARRIAGE-2 FAN)
to protect it from scratches.
19. Unscrew the two screws fixing

COVER(LEC4-01) to the carriage to
remove COVER(LEC4-01).
COVER(LEC4-01)
6-30
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
20. Disconnect all 14 connectors on the

PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01).
Connector
21. Unscrew the four screws fixing the

PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01) to the carriage
and remove the PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01)
and COVER(LEC4-UNDER).
PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01)
COVER(LEC4-UNDER)
22. Remove the tube from the clamp.
6-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
23. Unscrew the two screws fixing the

SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)InnerSide
to remove the
supporting the inner tube.
Note
The supply tube is easily dropped. Hold
the unit to prevent falling.
24. Remove CLAMP(TUBE)LV3-2, fixing

FFC cable and the ink tube together to
PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide (with two
screws).
Note
Do not scratch T-FENCE-LV64 on the
upper surface of Y-RAIL-UNIT64-CV.
25. Remove CLAMP(TUBE)-LV3 (three

locations) (IP-5620) or
CLAMP(TUBE)-LV3 (one location)
(IP-5520) and CLAMP(TUBE)-1 (two STAY(FFC)BackSide64
locations) fixing the FFC cable and the
ink tube together to
STAY(FFC)BackSide64 (with two
screws each).
Note
If the supply tube unit falls, CLAMP(TUBE)-LV3
T-FENCE-LV64 may get scratched.
Be careful when handling the unit.
26. Pull out the supply tube unit toward the

right side of the mainframe along STAY(FFC)FRONT-SIDE-64-CV
STAY(FFC)FRONT-SIDE-64-CV and
STAY(FFC)BackSide64
STAY(FFC)BackSide64.
Note
Do not drop the supply tube unit.
When pulling out INK-BOX-UNIT-CV

side on the ink tube, pass it under the PLATE(RIGHT)OuterSide
opening of PLATE(RIGHT)OuterSide.
6-32
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
27. Remove FIXED IMPLEMENT (two SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)InnerSide

units), (with one screw for each),
HOLDER-FFC (with two screws), and
SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)OutSide
(with two screws) from
on the carriage side of the supply tube
unit.
28. Unhook the upper hook of

CLAMP(TUBE)OutSide (eight
locations) to open it and remove the
FFC cable.
FFC CABLE
CLAMP(TUBE)OutSide
6-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
[Reassembly]
1. Set the outside of FFC CABLE to the

carriage side and route FFC CABLE
between two plates of Partition(FFC).
Route FFC CABLE between the two Partition(FFC)

plates of Partition(FFC) tightly to
remove the slack.
FFC CABLE
Fasten the upper hook for each

SUPPORT(SUS BELT)
CLAMP(TUBE)OutSide (eight
locations) to fix them.
CLAMP(TUBE)
Note
Do not open the arm part of the
CLAMP(TUBE)OutSide wider than the
position shown in the figure.
2. Get the ends of the two plates of Partition(FFC)

Partitions (FFC) lined up and match
these ends and FFC CABLE's marker.
FFC CABLE's marker
6-34
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
3. Align the Partition(FFC)'s concave side

and SUPPORT(SUS-BELT)'s notch and SUPPORT(SUS BELT)
press them to fit the projection on
SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)InnerSide.
4. Slide the FFC CABLE marking by 30mm

from the edge of
30mm
SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)S toward the
carriage board.
Keep a firm grip on the
SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)S, and fix it Marking
with two screws.
Note
Shift the marking by 30mm before fixing the
FFC CABLE to make sure the FFC CABLE SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)S
reaches the connector on the board.
5. Fix SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)OutSide to
SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)InnerSide with
two screws.
SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)OutSide
6-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6. Pass the supply tube unit through from

the right side of mainframe to inside of
STAY(FFC)FRONT-SIDE-64-CV
each STAY(FFC)1R and
STAY(FFC)2R.
STAY(FFC)BackSide64
Note
Before fixing it with the clamp, it can
easily fall from STAY(FFC)1R or
STAY(FFC)2R. Be careful when handling
it.
7. Hang the part connecting to

INK-BOX-UNIT-CV from the notch of
STAY(FFC)2R.
8. Pass the four FFC cables through the

eyehole of PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide.
Turn the area without printed
instruction upward and route them
upon the two FFC cables of
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV.
PLATE(RIGHT) InnerSide eyehole
9. Attach
to the carriage with two screws.
6-36
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
10. Secure the tubes with the clamps.
11. Move the carriage to the upper side of

SY and open
COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN) forward.
Note
Put a mat around
to protect it from a scratch.
COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN)
12. Insert the COVER(LEC4-UNDER)
COVER(LEC4-UNDER)
13. Put PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01) on the top of

COVER(LEC4-UNDER) and fix it to
the carriage with four screws.
PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01)
6-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
14. Connect the ink tubes to each head.
15. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque

of 3 kgf/cm (when tightening by hand,
turn another 90 degrees after you
begin to feel a small resistance). Or
tighten until the space between the
heads and the nuts is 4 mm. 4.0mm
16. Connect each of the connectors of the

six flexible flat cables separated from
the top of PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01), the
PCB-AS SY-SENS1 cable, the
CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY, the
CABLE(CarriageFan)-ASSY(CV), and
the CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV).
17. Pass the four FFC cables under the ink

tube to connect them to the
PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01) (four
connectors), and secure with the thin Thin clamp
clamp. FFC CABLE
6-38
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
18. Fix COVER(LEC4-01) to the carriage

with two screws.
COVER(LEC4-01)
19. Pinch the ink tube and the four FFC

cables between the inside of the hook
on CLAMP(TUBE)1, set the hook on
CLAMP(TUBE)1 to the hole of
STAY(FFC)BackSide64, and fix it with
the two screws (IP-5620: three
locations, IP-5520: one location).
Pinch the four FFC cables between the

inside of the hook on
CLAMP(TUBE)LV3, set the hook on
the CLAMP(TUBE)LV3 to the
STAY(FFC)BackSide64 hole, and fix it
with the two screws (IP-5620: three
locations, IP-5520: one location).
Note
When FFC CABLE is pinched between
the hook of CLAMP(TUBE)1 and
STAY(FFC)BackSide64, the cable may
get scratched. Be careful when handling
them.
6-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Especially, for the left CLAMP(TUBE)1

from the tow, the order is
STAY(FFC)BackSide64, Partition(FFC), Partition(FFC)
FFC four cables, Partition(FFC),
SUPPORT(SUS BELT), ink tube, and
CLAMP(TUBE)1, as shown in the figure.
FFC CABLE
With the claw on CLAMP(TUBE)1, pinch

Partition(FFC), FFC four cables, and
Partition(FFC) to fix them.
SUPPORT(SUS BELT)
CLAMP(TUBE)
The Partition(FFC) (yellow dotted line)

on the front must be secured so that the
left edge of the concave part touches the
right edge of CLAMP(TUBE)1.
The Partition (FFC)(Yellow dotted line) in

the front must be secured so that the left
The Partition(FFC) (yellow dotted line) edge of the concave part will touch the
Front Partition(FFC)
on the front must be secured so that the right edge of CLAMP(TUBE)LV3.
left edge of the concave part touches the Rear Partition(FFC)
right edge of CLAMP(TUBE)1.
CLAMP(TUBE)1
When fixing the left CLAMP(TUBE)1,
adjust the position of the ink tube and
SUPPORT(SUS-BELT) so that the gap
between the ink tube and
SUPPORT(SUS-BELT) in the loop of the
supply tube unit on the left becomes
5mm.
Leave no space between
SUPPORT(SUS-BELT), Partition(FFC)
and FFC Cable.
Move the carriage several times from

one side to the other and check that
there is no trouble including the
followings:
- Contact between the ink tube and

SUPPORT(SUS-BELT) causes
unstable movement of the ink tube,
and that makes an abnormal noise.
- The FFC cable goes slack between
Partition(FFC) and fills put.
Carriage
Do not let the unfixed FFC cable hang
down when the carriage is moving.
6-40
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
20. Align the FFC cable to the notch of

PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide, bend it so
that the printed area appears at the
front, and route it inside of the ink tube.
Printed area
PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide
21. Bind the ink tubes with

CLAMP(TUBE)LV3-2, put the FFC
cable in the concave portion of
CLAMP(TUBE)LV3-2, and fix
CLAMP(TUBE)LV3-2 to
PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide with two
screws.
22. Pass the FFC cable through the

eyehole of the
PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide and route
the FFC cable tightly in the
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV installation area to
remove the slack.
6-41
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Bending of FFC Cables

Clamp
Clamp
FFC cables for CN7 and CN8 of JUN1

- All four FFC cables (LEC-LEE9,
board are connected in "S" shape.
LEC-LEE10, LEC-LEE11, and
LEC-LEE12) are bent together and
clamped to a side plate in the back. FFC Cable for CN7 and CN8 of JUN1
substrate is connected in "S "shape.
150mm JUN1
150mm JUN1
Bend to change direction. As FFC cables are not long, in

reality they will be lifted slightly
Bend to change direction. form the plate.
Note As FFC Cables are not long

enough, in reality they will be lifted
Blue color in the figures indicates the slightly
printed side of FFC cables.
6-42
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
23. Attach the ink tube to

INK-BOX-UNIT-CV (six points, two
screws for each).
Note
Bind the six ink tubes closely according
to the wave shape of each tube.
24. Be sure to mount INK-BOX-UNIT-CV

in its original position with four screws. INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
Note
When inserting INK-BOX-UNIT-CV to the
mainframe, do not let FFC cables or
harness hang down.
25. Connect the harnesses (three Photo sensor LG248NL1 connector

locations) and the two FFC cables to
the top of PCB-ASSY-JUN1.
26. Connect Photo sensor LG248NL1

connector.
Clamp
Note PCB-ASSY-JUN1
After fixing the ink tube and harness with
the clamp, move the carriage to check
that they do not come into contact.
6-43
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
27. Bundle the four FFC cables connected

to the carriage and the two FFC cables
connected to INK-BOX-UNIT-CV with
the fixing brackets. Make sure that the
two FFC cables for CN7 and CN8 that
are connected to INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
have their printed sides facing up and
that the four FFC cables that are
connected to the carriage don't have
their printed sides facing up.
CN7
CN8
LEC-LEE12
LEC-LEE11
LEC-LEE10
LEC-LEE9
Note CN7
Green color in the figure CN8
indicates the
LEC-LEE12
LEC-LEE11
LEC-LEE10
LEC-LEE9
IP-5620
28. IP-5620
Pinch the bundled FFC cables in the
clamps (3 locations) on FRAME-UNIT
to fix them.
Eyehole
FLAT CABLE CLIP
IP-5520 Eyehole IP-5520

Pinch the bundled FFC cables in the
clamps (2 locations) on the left side of
FRAME-UNIT to fix them.
Adjust the slack parts of the FFC
cables like shown in (1) and (2) below.
FLAT CABLE CLIP
(1) Draw the four FFC cables
(LEC-LEE9, LEC-LEE10, LEC-LEE11,
LEC-LEE12) to the right and clamp
All four FFC cables（LEC-LEE9, LEC-LEE10,
them on FRAME-UNIT (one location).
LEC-LEE11, LEC-LEE12）
(2) Fold back the two FFC cables for

CN7 and CN8 and fix them with the
clamp (one location) nearest to the
eyehole on FRAME-UNIT. Eyehole FLAT CABLE CLIP
Two FFC cables for CN7 and CN8
FLAT CABLE CLIP Eyehole

6-44
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
29. Pass the FFC cable through the

eyehole of FRAME-ASSY64 and bend
it as shown in the figure below.
Bending of FFC Cables

For the FFC cables LEC-LEE9, For the FFC cables for CN7 and CN8
LEC-LEE10, LEC-LEE11, and LEC-LEE12
All four FFC cables Two FFC cables for CN7 and CN8 are bent
(LEC-LEE9,LEC-LEE10, together.
LEC-LEE11 and LEC-LEE12) are
bent together. Two FFC cables for CN7 and CN8 are bent
together.
IP-5620
All four FFC cables
(LECLEE9,LEC-LEE10, LECLEE11
and LEC-LEE12) are bent together.
Bend to change direction Bend to change direction

20mm
Bend to change direction Bend to change direction
20mm
IP-5520
Bend to change direction Bend 180 degrees to change direction

20mm
Note
Blue color in the figures indicates the
IP-5620 IP-5520
Eyehole Eyehole
Cables can be separated from the plate or Cables can be separated from the plate or
unbundled to a certain extent. unbundled to a certain extent.
6-45
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
30. Plug the FFC cables bundled together

into PCB-ASSY-LEECV connectors
(CN7 to 12) in the Controller box.
When controller box is fully opened

FFC Cable Length
No slack in FFC
cables
Connect the harness by laying it

under the FFC cables
When controller box is fully closed
Excellent bending of
The edges of all FFC cables must be
FFC cables
aligned to this side.
NG OK
6-46
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
31. See the photo for the guidance and fix

the FFC cables to
SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)InnerSide SUPPORT(Carriage-Tube)InnerSide
with HOLDER-FFC (two screws).
32. Fix STAY(HANDLE-R) to the

mainframe with four screws (two of
them at the PLATE(RIGHT)OuterSide
have an inner clip washer). HOLDER-FFC
PLATE(RIGHT)OuterSide
33. Install
(see 6.11.2). STAY(HANDLE-R)
34. Install COVER(PINCH-D)64 (see

6.3.11).
35. Install the exterior parts (see 6.3).

36. Turn on power and check the
operation.
COVER(PINCH-D)64
6-47
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.4.9 Y-MOTOR FAN ASSY

[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(SIDE-L)-CV
(see 6.3.5).
2. Disconnect Y-MOTOR FAN ASSY

cable one connector.
Y-MOTOR FAN ASSY cable connector

Y-MOTOR FAN ASSY to detach it. Y-MOTOR FAN ASSY
Y-MOTOR-UNIT
6-48
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.5 Disassembling and Reassembling X Driver
6.5.1 X-MOTOR-ASSY
With IP-5520, SHAFT(GR)64 is called SHAFT-GRIT-ROLLER-CV54.
[Disassembly]
1. Detach COVER(SIDE-L)-CV
(see 6.3.5).
2. Remove the Photo sensor

LG-248NL-1 and the
Scale(X-ENCORDER) (See 6.5.5).
3. Loosen the PLATE(X-MOTOR) two GEAR(GR)

fixing screws and move the PLATE(X-MOTOR)
X-MOTOR-ASSY to the rear. Then
shift PINION(X-MOTOR) and SHAFT(GR)64
GEAR(GR).

HOLDER(GEAR-GR), and remove
HOLDER(GEAR-GR) and the bearings.
PINION(X-MOTOR) HOLDER(GEAR-GR)
5. Remove the SPACER(X-MOTOR), GEAR(GR)

Spring(GR), GEAR(GR), and the Spring
parallel pin from SHAFT(GR)64.
Bearings
SHAFT(GR)64 SPACER(X-MOTOR)
SHAFT(GR)64
Note
Be careful not to drop the parallel pin
when removing GEAR(GR).
Parallel pin
PLATE(X-MOTOR)
6-49
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6. Disconnect the X-MOTOR-ASSY cable

connector.
7. Unscrew the two screws (refer to the SHAFT(GR)64

photo at the bottom in step 5) which fix
the PLATE(X-MOTOR), and remove
PLATE(X-MOTOR) and
X-MOTOR-ASSY(with PINION) (refer X-MOTOR-ASSY
to the photo in step 8).
X-MOTOR-ASSY cable connector

Install X-MOTOR-ASSY with the
connector facing down.
8. Unscrew the four screws which fix the

X-MOTOR-ASSY(with PINION)
X-MOTOR-ASSY(with PINION) from
PLATE(X-MOTOR) removed in step 7,
and detach X-MOTOR-ASSY(with
PINION).
PLATE(X-MOTOR)

- Torque driver
- Fan-shaped tension gauge (0.1 to
20N),
completely-reversed type
Manufacturer: Ohba Keiki Seisakusho
Tighten the screws (1) and (2) to the

specified torque (1.5Nm). At this time,
the gear tooth surface do not contact yet. (1)
(2)
6-50
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Loosen the screw (1) by 90 degrees.
(1)
Loosen the screw (2) by 180 degrees.
(2)
Put the part A to the arrow direction and

A
press the fan-shaped tension gauge with
5N to engage X-MOTOR-ASSY(with
PINION) and GEAR(GR) teeth.
Note
Do not hit GEAR(GR) with the
fan-shaped tension gauge.
Scratch on the GEAR(GR) may cause
banding.
Tighten the screw (2) to the specified

torque of 1.5Nm.
(2)
6-51
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Tighten the screw (1) to the specified

torque of 1.5Nm.
(1)
Rotate the shaft of the grid roller and

check visually that it fits well.
6.5.2 SUCTION FAN ASSY

With IP-5520, COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT, and
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY is called PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
SY (see 6.11.1).
2. Unscrew the two screws and SUCTION FAN ASSY

disconnect the connector (1) fixing
SUCTION FAN ASSY (IP-5620: four,
IP-5520: three) to detach them.
Connector
6-52
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.5.3 PCB-ASSY-SNS1 (Front side)

PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY is called PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
SY (see 6.11.1).
2. Unscrew the one screw and

disconnect the one connector from PCB-ASSY-SNS1
Screw
PCB-ASSY-SNS1 to detach it.
Connector
6.5.4 PCB-ASSY-SNS1 (Rear side)

PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT, and COVER(PINCH-D)64 is called COVER-PINCH-D-CV54.
[Disassembly]
(see 6.3.11) and
(see 6.11.2).
PCB-ASSY-SNS1
2. Unscrew the one screw and

disconnect the one connector from
PCB-ASSY-SNS1 to detach it. Screw
Connector
6-53
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.5.5 GRIT-UNIT
With IP-5520, PAPER-GUIDE-FEEDING64-CV-ASSY is called PAPER-GUIDE-FEED-CV54-UNIT,
COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT, GR64ASSY is called
GRIT-CV54-UNIT, SHAFT(GR)64 is called SHAFT-GRIT-ROLLER-CV54, and GR64ASSY is called
GRIT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
(see 6.3.5), and
(see 6.11.2).
COVER(COVER-FU)-CV(LV3), and
3. Remove ARM(PINCH),
ROLLER(PINCH)EX, LIFTER(PINCH),
Spring(Pinch-Center)1 (19 for each),
and Spring(Pinch-Side)2 (38)
(see 6.4.6).
4. Open the C retaining ring at the right PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide

end of GR64ASSY and slide it to the
left. Also slide the Oiles Glitron SE
Flange bushing to the left. (The photo
shows the status after sliding them.)
→ They become free from
PLATE(RIGHT)InnerSide.
C retaining ring
Oiles Glitron SE Flange bushing
5. In the same way, slide the C retaining PLATE(LEFT)InnerSide

ring, polyslider washer, and Oiles
Glitron SE Flange bushing at the left
end of GR64ASSY to the outside.(The
photo shows the status after sliding Oiles Glitron SE Flange bushing
them.)
→They become free from

PLATE(LEFT)InnerSide.
Polyslider washer
C retaining ring
6-54
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6. Loosen the two screws of

PLATE(X-MOTOR) and remove it from GEAR(GR)
GEAR(GR). PLATE(X-MOTOR)
SHAFT(GR)64

HOLDER(GEAR-GR), and remove Bearings
HOLDER(GEAR-GR) and the bearings.
HOLDER(GEAR-GR)
8. Remove the SPACER(X-MOTOR),
Spring(GR), and GEAR(GR) from GEAR(GR)
SHAFT(GR)64. Spring
SHAFT(GR)64 SPACER(X-MOTOR)
9. Pull out the parallel pin from

SHAFT(GR)64. Parallel pin
Collar
SHAFT(GR)64
10. Slide SHAFT(GR)64 a little to the left.
(The photo shows the status after
sliding it.)
→Bearing slips from the
PLATE(LEFT)OutSide.
11. Remove SHAFT(GR)64 upward.
Note PLATE(LEFT)OutSide
Be careful so that GR(B)-LV3 does not

get in contact with the platen.
SHAFT(GR)64
6-55
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.6 Disassembling and Reassembling Controller Box

[How to open controller box]
1. Make sure to unplug the power cord

from the outlet before performing this
operation.
2. Out of the screws securing FRAME-UNIT

COVER(BASE-REAR), unscrew the
10 front screws, and loosen the five
screws on the FRAME-UNIT side to
detach COVER(BASE-REAR).
COVER(BASE-REAR)
3. Loosen fully the five screws on the

FRAME-UNIT side at the rear of FRAME-UNIT
Controller box.
Controller
4. Out of the screws of the Controller Loosen

box's side plates, unscrew the two
screws securing the base plate and
loosen the three screws of other slits to
open the front of the base plate
downward.
Unscrew
Base plate
6-56
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. To further open the controller box,

unscrew two other screws with the
upper slit screws remaining.
Unscrew
6.6.1 FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV
[Disassembly]
1. Make sure to unplug the power cord

from the outlet before performing this
operation.
2. Open the controller box (see 6.6).
3. Open the clamp pinching the

FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV cable.
Clamp
4. Disconnect the
FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV cable
connector from PCB-ASSY-LEECV.
Connector
FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV
5. Unscrew the two screws of PCB-ASSY-LEECV

FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV on the
controller box rear panel to detach
FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV. FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV
6-57
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.6.2 POWER SUPPLY

[Disassembly]
2. Disconnect the two cable connectors

from POWER SUPPLY.
POWER SUPPLY
Connector
3. Unscrew the four outer screws fixing

POWER SUPPLY on the controller box
to remove POWER SUPPLY.
Bottom of controller box
6-58
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.6.3 Printed Circuit Boards (PCB-ASSY-LEECV,

PCB-ASSY-TRC-CV)
[Disassembly]
2. Disconnect all the cable connectors

from these PCBs.
3. Unscrew the screws (16 for

PCB-ASSY-LEECV, six for
PCB-ASSY-TRC-CV) to remove these
boards.
Controller box (rear)
Note
Among the screws that fix
PCB-ASSY-LEECV, remove the one on
the USB connector block from the
outside. USB connector
Note
See 5.8 Settings when Replacing Engine
Board (LEECV) for information on the
settings after board replacement. PCB-ASSY-LEECV
PCB-ASSY-TRC-CV
6-59
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.6.4 CABLE(HeaterSwitch)ASSY
[Disassembly]
1. Open the controller box fully. (See 6.6)
2. Remove the connectors from the back

of each CABLE(HeaterSwitch)ASSY.
CABLE(HeaterSwitch)ASSY
3. Unscrew the screws (two for each)

fixing the CABLE(HeaterSwitch)ASSY
on the outer side of the controller box
and remove the
CABLE(HeaterSwitch)ASSY.
6-60
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.6.5 IC(EEPROM)
[Disassembly]
1. Insert a flathead precision screwdriver PCB-ASSY-LEECV

under the IC(EEPROM) on the
PCB-ASSY-LEECV board to remove it.
Note
- Confirm that the power has been
turned off before replacement. IC(EEPROM)
- Take measures against static
electricity.
- Pay attention to the polarity during
reassembly.
- The correct orientation is with the
package's pin 1 side mark on the
right hand side. If the IC(EEPROM)
is installed in the wrong orientation,
the EEPROM will break when turning
on the power.
- When replacing the IC(EEPROM),
refer to 5.8 Settings when
Replacing Engine Board (LEECV).
6-61
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7 Disassembling/Reassembling Head and Carriage

Note
With the 4 color specifications, the two heads on the right are not installed, but are
replaced by plates. Also, the two FFC cables on the left are folded and fixed.
6.7.1 REPLACEMENT OF PRINT HEAD

< Print head >
Connector part
Cap
Print head
Head protection cap
Notes
These precautions are recommended to avoid ink leakage and damage to your printer.
(1) Open the print head's aluminum bag only just before the print head replacement.
(2) Be careful not to fall the print head and not to give it a shock during replacement. Do
not touch the nozzle surface, protrusions and connector part.
Protrusion Protrusion
突起部詳細(正面)
Nozzle
surface ノズル面
Nozzle surface
6-62
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3) Replace the print head following the procedure described below.
(4) To avoid smearing your hands, the use of gloves is recommended. If ink gets into your
eyes, rinse with clean water and consult a doctor immediately. If swallowed, do not try
to induce vomiting. Consult a doctor immediately.
(5) Store the used print head after covering its nozzle surface with the head protection cap,
and ink needle with the cap, and putting it in an aluminum bag.
<Print head installation jig>
When replacing the print head, use the SRPING(HEAD-ADJUST)ASSY that includes a screw,
nut, washer, cap, and pressuring coil spring.
Pressuring coil spring
Cap
This jib is installed in the maintenance area, so remove it from there to use it. (Remove the cap
when replacing the print head.)
6-63
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1. Press key to set the printer to

off-line. INK MEDIA REG
MEDIA M.ADJ
2. Press the keys in the order of

, , ,
and then input the password
( See 3.2 Maintenance Mode) to enter
the maintenance mode.
3. Push key to display REWIND FROM FEED

PH.MAIN menu.
PH.REC PH.MAIN
4. Press key to enter PH.MAIN

#REPLACE PRINTHEAD
menu and key to select
>
REPLACE PRINTHEAD.
5. Press key.
#REPLACE PRINTHEAD
＊OK?
#PRINT HEAD SELECT

6. Select the head color to replace.
＊ZZ
ZZ : Head (Y, M, C, K, Lm, Lc)
6-64
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Input the head serial number. #ZZ SERIAL NUMBER

＊0000000000
ZZ : Head
xxxxxxxxxx: Serial number (10 characters)
Range: A to Z, 0 to 9
Voltage rank A
Voltage rank B
Número de série
8. Input the head voltage rank A

#ZZ HEAD RANK VOLTAGE A
＊XX.XV
XX.X: Head rank voltage
#INPUT VALUE CHECK

＊OK?
9. Input the head voltage rank B

#ZZ HEAD RANK VOLTAGE B
＊XX.XV
XX.X: Head rank voltage
#INPUT VALUE CHECK

＊OK?
6-65
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
10. Press key and pull out the ink

REMOVE INK CARTRIDGE
cartridge of the color whose print head
is to be replaced.
11. Insert a print head replacement

cartridge.
INSTALL PRINTHEAD
REPLACEMENT CART
*OK?
XX : Print head color
XX : Print Head color Print head replacement cartridge
Note
Set or remove ink cartridges and print
head replacement cartridges by following
the front panel indication, or ink leakage
may occur.
12. Press the key to move the CARRIAGE MOVING

carriage to the maintenance position.
PLEASE WAIT
A warning beep sounds while the print
head is not capped.
(The warning beep can be inactivated OPEN COVER
with the printer settings.)
XX : Print Head color

13. Open the front cover and the
maintenance cover. Front cover
CLOSE COVER

Maintenance cover
XX : Print Head color
6-66
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
14. Hold the both sides of the head cover

with both hands. Pull the cover forward
to open.
Head cover
15. Unscrew the two screws securing the

WEIGHT-ASSY-CV, and remove the
WEIGHT-ASSY-CV.
WEIGHT-ASSY-CV
16. Remove the FFC cable connected to

the print head by pulling from above.
17. Rotate the joint and remove the ink

tube by pulling from above.
Note
Face the tube opening upward and fix it
with tape to prevent the ink from leaking.
Joint
6-67
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
18. Remove the cap from the new print

head, and attach it to the used print
head.
Note
Operations from removing the joint of the
used print head to attaching the cap Cap
must be done as quickly as possible to
avoid ink leakage.
19. Remove the heater cable one

connector from the head heater.
Note
Hold the heater board with your hand
when removing the heater cable Heater cable
connector.
Connector

Head replacement
print head.
screwdriver
Note
Use the head replacement screwdriver
(recommended: No.1300 Plastic Grip
Screwdriver (+) 2x100 by VESSEL)
when removing these screws.
21. Remove the used print head.
Print head
6-68
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Note
Do not perform steps 22 and 23 when a head heater is already installed on the new print
head.

head heater of the used print head and
to remove the head heater. (see 6.7.9)
Note
Be careful not to lose the spacer located
between the screws and the print head.
23. Fix the head heater to the new print

head with two screws
24. Install the new print head.
Note
Make sure that the print head right back
corner contacts with the spring plate
shown in the photo to the right.
Spring plate
Note
When installing the new print head, set
the back screw to the print head in
advance.
Note
Be careful not to damage the nozzle
plate when inserting the print head.
6-69
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
25. Fix temporarily the print head with two

screws.
26. Remove the

SPRING(HEAD-ADJUST)ASSY from
the maintenance area and install it as
shown in the photo to the
SPRING(HEAD-ADJUST)ASSY
27. Hang the pressuring coil spring to the

hole in the head heater board.
Head heater board
Pressuring coil spring
6-70
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
28. Secure the temporarily fixed print head

with two screws.
Note
Make sure that the two protrusions on
the print head contact the locations
Note
Secure the print head starting from the
back screws.
29. Remove the pressure coil spring from

the head heater, then remove the Print head protrusion
SPRING(HEAD-ADJUST)ASSY.
Note
When removing
SPRING(HEAD-ADJUST)ASSY, be sure
to first remove it from the hook attached
to the head heater board.
Then turn the screw to remove
SPRING(HEAD-ADJUST)ASSY from the
head base.
30. Connect the FFC cable to the print

head.
Note
Connect the FFC cable straight and fully.
If connected at an angle, the terminal of
the FFC cable may be damaged and
poor contact may result.
FFC cable
6-71
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
31. Connect the ink tube's joint to the print

head and secure with the nut.
Note
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque
of 3 kgf/cm (when tightening by hand,
turn another 90 degrees after you begin
to feel a small resistance). Or tighten
until the space between the heads and Nut
the nuts is 4 mm. (see 6.4.8).
32. Connect the heater cable connector to

the print head.
Heater cable
Connector
33. Secure the WEIGHT-ASSY-CV with

two screws.
WEIGHT-ASSY-CV
Note
Make sure the WEIGHT-ASSY-CV is
installed to the correct position. Also be
careful not to pinch the harness when
installing the WEIGHT-ASSY-CV.
Make some space to install the

WEIGHT-ASSY-CV
34. Close the head cover, maintenance

cover, and front cover.
Head cover
6-72
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
35. The carriage moves when the front

cover is closed.
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
36. Pull out the print head replacement

cartridge. Print head replacement cartridge
REMOVE PRINTHEAD
REPLACEMENT CART
37. Insert the ink cartridge.

RE-INSTALL CARTRIDGE
38. Confirm that the waste ink bottle is not CHARGE NEW PH
full, and press the key.
*BOTTLE OK?
Then the ink charge starts.
INK REFILLING
XXX
XXX : The numeral is counted down.
39. When the ink charge is completed,
press key to set the printer to XXＸ : The numeral is counted down.
online.
40. After the print head replacement, be

sure to perform the confirmation and
adjustment.
Note
After the print head replacement, be sure to perform the following confirmation and
adjustment.
(1) Nozzle check pattern NOZZLE PRINT

Confirm that there is no clogged nozzle in the new print head.
If a clogged nozzle is found, perform the cleaning NORMAL.
(2) Nozzle position adjustment NOZZLE POS ADJ

Adjust the nozzle position following the adjustment procedure of NOZZLE POS ADJ in
Head position adjustment - Maintenance and Adjustment/Replacement in the
User's Guide.
6-73
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
(3) Head position adjustment POS ADJ

Adjust the head position following the adjustment procedure of POS ADJ in Head
position adjustment - Maintenance and Adjustment/Replacement in the User's
Guide.
(4) Head right/left adjustment R/L ADJ

(Only for the newly-installed print head)
Adjust the print position in the right and left directions following the adjustment
procedure of R/L ADJ in Head position adjustment - Maintenance and
Adjustment/Replacement in the User's Guide.
(5) Sensor position adjustment SENSOR ADJUST

(Only when K print head was replaced)
adjustment procedure of SENSOR ADJUST in Head position adjustment -
Maintenance and Adjustment/Replacement in the User's Guide.
6-74
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7.2 FFC(LED-HEAD)
With IP-5520, COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT
[Disassembly]
1. Remove the COVER(PCB)-CV.

(see 6.3.3)
2. Open the COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV,

COVER(COVER-FU)-CV and
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV. (see
Disassembling and Reassembling
Exterior Parts)

4. Pull open the

COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN).
5. Unscrew the two screws fixing teh

COVER(LEC4-01). (See 6.4.8)
COVER(LEC4-01)
6. Remove the six FFC(LEC-HEAD)

(connectors on both side for each).
FFC(LEC-HEAD)
6-75
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
<Bending of FFC(LEC-HEAD)>
1. (1) is obtained by folding toward the

lower side at 20mm from the end.
(2) is obtained by folding at 90 degrees
toward the lower side at 120mm from 20mm 120mm
(1).
(1) (2)
2. Fold toward the upper side from (3).

120mm
(3)
Print head side
LEC4 board side
6-76
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7.3 PCB-ASSY-SNS1
[Disassembly]
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV (See 6.3).
2. Remove the one screw that fixes the

COVER-EDGE-SENSOR to the
BASE-HEAD_LOWER and remove the
COVER-EDGE-SENSOR
COVER-EDGE-SENSOR.
BASE-HEAD_LOWER
3. Remove the one connector of

PCB-ASSY-SNS1.
4. Remove the one screw that fixes the Connector

PCB-ASSY-SNS1 to the
BASE-HEAD_LOWER and remove the
PCB-ASSY-SNS1.

Install PCB-ASSY-SNS1 parallel to
PCB-ASSY-SNS1
BASE-HEAD_LOWER.
BASE-HEAD_LOWER
6-77
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7.4 PCB-ASSY-LEC4
[Disassembly]
1. Remove the COVER(PCB)-CV.

(see 6.3.3)

3. Open the COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV,

COVER(FU)-CV and COVER(FB)-CV.
(see Disassembling and
Reassembling Exterior Parts)
4. Pull open the


COVER(LEC4-01)
6. Remove the six FFC(LEC-HEAD)

cable, FFC3-ASSY, FFC4-ASSY, CABLE(Y-Encoder)-ASSY
FFC(LEC-HEAD)
FFC5-ASSY, FFC6-ASSY,
CABLE(Y-Encoder)-ASSY,
PCB-ASSY-SNS1 cable, fan cable and
head heater cable connectors from the
PCB-ASSY-LEC4 board.
Notes for installation PCB-ASSY-SNS1

cable
Do not confuse the position for
connecting the head cables.
CABLE(CarrigeFan)
FFC3-ASSY, FFC4-ASSY
-ASSY(CV)
FFC5-ASSY, FFC6-ASSY
CABLE(Head-Heater)-
ASSY(CV)
6-78
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Unscrew the four screws fixing

PCB-ASSY-LEC4 to remove it.
PCB-ASSY-LEC4(01)
6-79
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7.5 HEAD-ALIGNMENT-ASSY-CV
[Disassembly]
1. Remove PRINT-HEAD.
2. Unscrew the screws fixing the six

HEAD-ALIGNMENT-ASSY-CV (two for
each) to remove it.

When installing the
HEAD-ALIGNMENT-ASSY-CV to the
HEADBASE, insert the
BAR-ADJUST-CV for positioning. BAR-ADJUST-CV
6-80
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7.6 CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY
[Disassembly]
2. Lower CAPPING-UNIT and move the

carriage to the center.
3. Pull open the


COVER(LEC4-01)
5. Remove the CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY

connector from the PCB-ASSY-LEC4.
CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY
6-81
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6. Unscrew the one screw fixing

HOLDER-ENCODER to the carriage to
remove HOLDER-ENCODER,
HOLDER-ENCODER2, and
CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY. HOLDER-ENCODER2
7. Unscrew the two screws of HOLDER-ENCODER

CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY to detach it
from HOLDER-ENCODER2.

Move the carriage to check visually that
CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY does not
contact to the side area and the upper CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY
surface of T-FENCE.
6-82
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7.7 FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV
[Disassembly]

carriage to the left.
3. Pull open the

4. Disconnect the two connectors of the COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN)

FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV cable,
and open the two clamps and cut the
one cable-tie fixing the cable to Cable-tie
Clamps
FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV
Connector
5. Remove the four screws that fix the

FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV to the
COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN) and
remove the FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY
HV.
Note
Hold FAN(CARRIAGE)-ASSY HV from
the inside so that it does not fall. COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN)
6-83
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7.8 CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV)
[Disassembly]
COVER(FR-U)ASSY(LV3), and
COVER(FB-U)ASSY(LV3) (see 6.3).

carriage to the center.
3. Pull open the

4. Remove the six connectors connected

to the PCB-ASSY-HT2.
Note
Hold the head heater board when
removing the connectors.

COVER(LEC4-01) to the carriage and
remove COVER(PCB-LEC)U.
6. Remove the
CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV)
connector from PCB-ASSY-LEC4.
CABLE(Head-Heater)-ASSY(CV)
6-84
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.7.9 HEAD-HEATER-ASSY
[Disassembly]
1. Remove the print head. (See 6.7.1)
2. Put the print head on the side on an

even surface.
3. Loosen the two screws securing

HEAD-HEATER-ASSY by an half turn
and remove the
HEAD-HEATER-ASSY.
Note
The spacer may be lost when removing
the screws. Loosen the screws slowly,
step by step.
When removing these screws, use the

HEAD-HEATER-ASSY replacement
screwdriver (recommended: No.6100
Plastic Crystalline screwdriver (+) 1x100
by VESSEL).
PCB-ASSY-HT2
SHEET(HEAD-HEATER) HEAD-HEATER-ASSY
Screw
Spacer
Print head
4. Remover the screws and spacers.
Note
Be careful not to lose the spacers.
6-85
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
[Reassembly]
PCB-ASSY-HT2
5. HEAD-HEATER-ASSY is the assembly SHEET (HEAD-HEATER) and the
of SHEET (HEAD-HEATER) and Temperature fuse temperature fuse do not contact
PCB-ASSY-HT2. Check that the
SHEET (HEAD-HEATER) is stuck to
the PCB-ASSY-HT2 as shown in the
photo to the right. If the SHEET
(HEAD-HEATER) is coming off, stick it
as in the photo. In this case, make sure
that the temperature fuse and the
heat-conduction sheet do not contact. SHEET(HEAD-HEATER) HEAD-HEATER-ASSY
6. Put the print head on its side and place

the two spacers on the screw holes.
7. Put the two screws through the two

spacers and tighten them slightly by
leaving a space to the spacers as
8. Insert the screw holes of the

HEAD-HEATER-ASSY in the space
between the spacers and the screw
heads. Make sure to insert them fully.
Insert fully
6-86
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Note
Check that the order of the parts from the
top is screw, HEAD-HEATER-ASSY,
spacer and print head as shown in the
picture below.
Screw
HEAD-HEATER-ASSY
Spacer
Print head
9. Secure evenly the two screws while

checking that there is no gap with the
board. Also make sure that the SHEET
(HEAD-HEATER) of the
HEAD-HEATER-ASSY contacts
completely.
6-87
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.8 Disassembling and Reassembling WIPING-UNIT-CV
WIPING-UNIT-CV works together with MOTOR(CAP)ASSY in CAPPING-UNIT-CV. See 6.9.6

for replacing the drive motor.
6.8.1 WIPING-UNIT-CV
With 5520, COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called CO
VER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT
[Disassembly]

3. Pull CASE(WIPE)-ASSY out of

WIPING-UNIT-CV.
WIPING-UNIT-CV
Note
Be careful not to spill the wiper cleaning
liquid from CASE(WIPE)-ASSY.
When the wiper cleaning liquid bottle is

on the CASE(WIPE)-ASSY, do not pull it
out to prevent the liquid from coming out.
CASE(WIPE)-ASSY
6-88
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

WIPING-UNIT-CV. Fit projections
into holes
RUBBER(WIPE)
WIPING-UNIT-
Install WIPING-UNIT-CV temporarily to CV Projection of
the printer frame, adjust the position, and
CAPPING-UNIT
then tighten the screws to secure
WIPING-UNIT-CV.
POSITIONING CHECK
1. Check that the projections of the Notch of WIPING-UNIT-CV
printer are fitted into the holes next to
the WIPING-UNIT-CV screw holes.
2. Pull WIPING-UNIT-CV (to the media
feeding direction) and check that the
projection (metal plate) of
CAPPING-UNIT-CV is in contact with
the end of WIPING-UNIT-CV notch.
SWITCH(WIPE)-ASSY cable connector

5. Lift WIPING-UNIT-CV, disconnect the
SWITCH(WIPE)-ASSY cable
connector, and remove
WIPING-UNIT-CV.

- Adjust installation position by turning
the chain so that RUBBER(WIPE)
comes at the position shown below,
and then install WIPING-UNIT-CV.
- Do not put the SWITCH (WIPE)-ASSY WIPING-UNIT-CV

cable between the mainframe and
WIPING-UNIT-CV or in the black
plastic support under
WIPING-UNIT-CV.
RUBBER(WIPE)
CASE(WIPE)-ASSY
6-89
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.8.2 SWITCH(WIPE)-ASSY, HOLDER(WIPE-LEVER)-ASSY

[Disassembly]
1. Remove WIPING-UNIT-CV
(see 6.7.9).
2. Unscrew the one screw of

HOLDER(WIPE-LEVER)-ASSY to SWITCH(WIPE)-ASSY
detach it.

SWITCH(WIPE)-ASSY to detach it
from HOLDER(WIPE-LEVER)-ASSY.
HOLDER(WIPE-LEVER)-ASSY

- Check that the terminal comes in
contact only when the lever is pressed
by HOLDER (BLADE) when turning. If
the switch does not work like this,
adjust the SWITCH(WIPE)-ASSY
installation angle.
- Push HOLDER(WIPE-LEVER)-ASSY
through the mounting hole to reach the
end of the hole, then, fix it.
6-90
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.9 Disassembling and Reassembling CAPPING-UNIT-CV
6.9.1 CAPPING-UNIT-CV
With 5520, COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
1. Open COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV ,
2. Remove COVER(SIDE-R)-CV,
COVER(TOOL-BOX)-CV,
COVER(FRD)-CV, and BOX(TOOL)
LV3 (see 6.3).
3. Remove WIPING-UNIT-CV
(see 6.7.9).
4. Pull SHEET(WASTE) out of

CASE(WASTE).
5. Remove the six tubes pinched

between the projections inside PUMP-F-ASSY-CV
CASE(WASTE) under SHEET(WASTE)
PUMP-F-ASSY-CV to make them
unfixed.
Tube
CASE(WASTE)
Inner projection
CAPPING-UNIT-CV
SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY
6. Disconnect the SWITCH(CAP)ASSY connector
connector and unscrew the right two
screws securing CAPPING-UNIT-CV.
Projection
Right screws
6-91
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7. Disconnect the MOTOR(CAP)ASSY

connector and unscrew the left two
screws securing CAPPING-UNIT-CV.
Projection
Left screws MOTOR(CAP)ASSY connector
8. Disconnect the MOTOR(CAPPING)

connector on the back of the right CAPPING-UNIT-CV
corner of CAPPING-UNIT-CV, and
remove CAPPING-UNIT-CV.
MOTOR(CAPPING) connector

- When setting the pump tube between
the projections of CASE(WASTE), be
sure to make the tube end touch the
inside bottom of CASE(WASTE) that
receives waste ink, in order to remove
the remaining ink inside the tube.
CASE(WASTE)
- Position CAPPING-UNIT-CV with the
right and left projections, and then
secure it.
Tube
- Fit SHEET(WASTE) with the four

projections of CASE(WASTE).
Projections of
CASE(WASTE)
CASE(WASTE)
6-92
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.9.2 VALVE-ASSY
[Disassembly]
2. Release the hook on the left side of COVER(VALVE)

COVER(VALVE) and remove it.
Note
Before detaching the right
COVER(VALVE), detach the left
COVER(VALVE).
Hook
3. Remove SPRING(VALVE) from SPRING(VALVE)

PLATE(VALVE). PLATE(VALVE)
4. Remove the snap fit from

HOLDER(VALVE) and turn PLATE
(VALVE) to the front to remove it from
ARM(VALVE). ARM(VALVE)
HOLDER(VALVE) Snap fit

HOLDER(VALVE) to detach it.
HOLDER(VALVE)
6. Remove SPRING(VALVE) from

VALVE-ASSY.
7. Remove the collar fixing the tube and

the tube from VALVE-ASSY.
Collar
HOLDER(VALVE)
Tube
6-93
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.9.3 CAP_ASSY, JOINT(CAP Sa)

[Disassembly]
1. Open COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV, right

2. Release the hook of COVER(CAP-F)

at the back of FRAME(UD-F), and COVER(CAP-F)
remove COVER(CAP-F).
Projections
3. Release the hook of CAP_ASSY and
remove CAP_ASSY and the two
JOINT(CAP Sa). Hook CAP_ASSY
JOINT(CAP Sa)

- Insert JOINT(CAP Sa) into the
CAP_ASSY so that its round projection
comes out by 2mm, and install it onto
FRAME(UD-F).
- When installing COVER(CAP-F),
check that it is hooked to FRAME CAP_ASSY
(UDF) securely.
- Wash each CAP part with alcohol.
- Install cap parts free from ink or other FRAME(UD-F)
damp.
6-94
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.9.4 MOTOR(CAPPING)-ASSY
[Disassembly]
1. Remove CAPPING-UNIT-CV
(see 6.9.1).

PLATE(BACK) to detach it.
PLATE(BACK)

MOTOR(CAPPING)-ASSY to detach it
from FRAME(CAPPING-R).
MOTOR(CAPPING)-ASSY
FRAME(CAPPING-R)
Note
- Never detach BRACKET(GEAR). The
internal gear position has been
adjusted at the factory.
- MOTOR(CAPPING)-ASSY and
BRACKET(GEAR)
COVER(UDM) are secured together.
6.9.5 SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY, LEVER(CAP)-ASSY

[Disassembly]
(See 6.3.5) and open BRACKET(GEAR)
COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV,
SCREW(CAM-LOCK)
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV.
Cable tie
LEVER(CAP)-ASSY
6-95
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2. Remove the one screw fixing

LEVER(CAP)-ASSY and connectors of
SCREW(CAM-LOCK) and
LEVER(CAP)-ASSY cable from
BRACKET(GEAR), cut the one cable
tie fixing the cable, and remove the
LEVER(CAP)-ASSY.
Connector
Note
Never detach BRACKET(GEAR). The
internal gear position has been adjusted
at the factory.
3. Remove the one screw that fixes the

SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY to the LEVER(CAP)-ASSY
LEVER(CAP)-ASSY and remove the
SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY.
SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY

- Of the two screws that fix the BRACKET(GEAR) SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY
LEVER(CAP)-ASSY to the
BRACKET(GEAR), first fix the thinner
one screw at the bottom and then Hexagonal hole of
lower the upper section of the GEAR (CAPPINGMIDDLE)
LEVER(CAP)-ASSY so that the
SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY terminal is
visible. Check that the terminal comes
in contact only when the GEAR(CAM) Screw
rotates and presses on the lever. If this LEVER(CAP)-ASSY
operation cannot be obtained, adjust
the angle of the SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY.
- SCREW(CAM-LOCK) cannot be installed while SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY is pressed. In that
case, turn SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY clockwise using the hexagonal hole of GEAR
(CAPPINGMIDDLE) to the position where SWITCH(CAP)-ASSY is not pressed.
6-96
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.9.6 MOTOR(CAP)ASSY
[Disassembly]
1. Remove CAPPING-UNIT-CV
(see 6.9.1). COVER(PWM)
2. Unscrew the screw (1) of

COVER(PWM) to detach it from
FRAME(CAPPING-L).
COVER(PWM) screw
3. Unscrew the two screws and

disconnect the connector from
MOTOR(CAP)ASSY to detach it from MOTOR(CAP)ASSY
FRAME(CAPPING-L).
6.9.7 PUMP-F-ASSY-CV
[Disassembly]
1. Open COVER(COVER-FU)-CV and FRAME(PUMP)

COVER(COVER-FB)-CV and remove PUMP-F-ASSY-CV
COVER(FRD)-CV. Then pull
SHEET(WASTE) out of
CASE(WASTE).
Hex nut
2. Unscrew the hex nut (one per pump)
securing the tube connected to the
tube to FRAME(UDF), and remove the
tube. Tube to FRAME(UD-F)
3. Unscrew the screws (two per pump) of

PUMP-F-ASSY-CV to detach it from
FRAME(PUMP).

- Install PUMP-F-ASSY-CV so that its
roller position differs by 90 degrees
alternately from roller positions of
adjacent units.
- Pinch the pump tube between the
projections of CASE(WASTE) so that
the end of the tube comes in contact
with the inside bottom of
CASE(WASTE).
6-97
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.9.8 SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSY
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(FRD)-CV (see 6.3.8)

and WASTE-INK-BOTTLE(SIIT).
2. Remove the connector for the

SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSY that is
connected to the bottom of the
FRAME-UNIT.
FRAME-UNIT
SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSYconnector
WASTE-INK-BOTTLE(SIIT)
3. Push in the hooks on both sides of the

COVER(WASTE) and remove the
HOLDER(WASTE-BOTTLE)
COVER(WASTE) and the SPRING
(WASTE) from the
HOLDER(WASTE-BOTTLE). COVER(WASTE)
4. Remove the one screw that fixes the Hook

SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSY to the
HOLDER(WASTE-BOTTLE) and then
remove the SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSY.
Projection of LEVER(WASTE)
5. Remove the SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSY

through the hole of the COVER(WASTE)
COVER(WASTE).

SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSY
- Check that the contacts touch each
other only when the lever is pressed. If SPRING(WASTE)
the switch does not work like this,
adjust the SWITCH(WASTE)-ASSY
installation angle.
- Fit the end of SPRING(WASTE) with
the two projections of LEVER(WASTE).
6-98
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.10 Disassembling and Reassembling Ink Cartridge Section

Note
With 4 color specifications, the two ink cartridges slots to the right
are closed with plates.
6.10.1 PCB-ASSY-JUN1
[Disassembly]
2. Unscrew the four screws (two of them STAY(HANDLE-R)

on PLATE(RIGHT)MT2 side have an
inner clip washer) fixing
STAY(HANDLE-R) to removeit.
3. Disconnect all connectors and

unscrew the five screws of
PCB-ASSY-JUN1 to remove it from
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV.
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
PCB-ASSY-JUN1
6-99
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.10.2 PCB-ASSY-B1
(Cartridge Board on BOX side)
[Disassembly]

on the PLATE(RIGHT)MT2 side have
an inner clip washer) fixing STAY(HANDLE-R)
STAY(HANDLE-R) to remove it.
3. Disconnect the Photo sensor Photo sensor LG248NL1 connector

LG248NL1 connector.

tube and harness.
Clamp
6-100
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

remove the two FFC cables from
PCB-ASSY-JUN1 on
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV.
6. Among the 4 screws fixing

INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
down.
Note
When unscrewing the upper screws,
keep the installation position in mind.
7. Cover the tip of the needle inside

INK-BOX-UNIT-CV with the tube for
packaging to avoid spilling of ink.
6-101
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8. Disconnect the six connectors of the

six CABLE(InkCartridge)-ASSY CABLE(InkCartridge)-ASSY
connector (one for each) from BRACKET(B1)
BRACKET(B1).
9. Remove the two A screws securing

BRACKET(B1) and remove the six Connector A screws
BRACKET(B1).
Notch

PCB-ASSY-B1 to remove it from PCB-ASSY-B1
BRACKET(B1).

Push the projections of BRACKET(B1) to
contact the notch hole edges at the rear
of INK-BOX-UNIT-CV and install it.
Projections
BRACKET(B1)
6-102
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.10.3 FILTER-ASSY(PIN-TYPE)-LV3
[Disassembly]

on the PLATE(RIGHT)MT2 side have STAY(HANDLE-R)
an inner clip washer) fixing
STAY(HANDLE-R) to remove it.
3. Disconnect the Photo sensor

LG248NL1 connector. Photo sensor LG248NL1 connector

tube and harness.
Clamp
6-103
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL

remove the two FFC cables from Connectors
PCB-ASSY-JUN1 on
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV .
FFC CABLE
6. Among the 4 screws fixing INK-BOX-UNIT-CV

down.
Note
When removing the upper screws, keep
the installation position in mind.
7. Cover the tip of the needle inside

INK-BOX-UNIT-CV with the tube for
packaging to avoid spilling of ink.
8. Pull the six ink tubes off Ink tube

FILTER-ASSY(PIN-TYPE)-LV3, and
remove INK-BOX-UNIT-CV. FILTER-ASSY(PIN-TYPE)-LV3

FILTER-ASSY(PIN-TYPE)-LV3 to
remove the six
FILTER-ASSY(PIN-TYPE)-LV3 from
the INK-BOX-UNIT-CV rear.
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV
Attach COLLAR(TUBE)6 when inserting
ink tube.
6-104
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.10.4 SENSOR
[Disassembly]
1. Remove COVER(INK-CART)-CV
(see 6.3.9).
2. Unscrew the one screw of INK-BOX-UNIT-CV

BRACKET(INK-END)SENSOR to Connector
detach the six
BRACKET(INKEND)SENSOR.
3. Disconnect the
CABLE(InkEndSensor)-ASSY
connector.
SENSOR
Unscrew the one screw of SENSOR to CABLE(InkEndSensor)-ASSY
detach it from
BRACKET(INK-END)SENSOR
BRACKET(INK-END)SENSOR.

Install SENSOR so that the SENSOR
surface is visible from inside
INK-BOX-UNIT-CV.
6-105
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.11 Disassembling and Reassembling Heater Section
6.11.1 PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY (with heater)

PAPER-GUIDE-FEED-CV54-UNIT (with heater)
With IP-5520, COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT,
FRAME(CUTTER)64 is called FRAME-CUTTER-CV54, and PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY
is called PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
(see 6.3.1).
2. Remove EDGEGUARDASSY(L)-CV
and EDGEGUARDASSY(R)-CV
(See 6.11.4).
3. Remove FRAME(CUTTER)64
(See 6.3.15).
4. Unscrew the screws (IP-5620: 14,

IP-5520: 11) of
6-106
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Open the
SY forward and disconnect the two Connector
heater cable connectors inside.
Left side interior

Heater
Heater Right side interior

PLATEN64-CV-ASSY
- Install the
SY in contact with
PLATEN64-CV-ASSY.
- Be careful not to hit the
PCB-ASSY-SNS1 (See 6.5.3).
6-107
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.11.2 PAPER-GUIDE-FEEDING64-CV-ASSY
With IP-5520, COVER(PINCH-D)64 is called COVER-PINCH-D-CV54, and
PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY64-CV-ASSY is called PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT
[Disassembly]
(see 6.3.11). PAPER-GUIDE-FEEDING64-CV-ASSY
2. Unscrew the screws (IP-5620: eight,

IP-5520: seven) fixing the
PAPER-GUIDE-FEEDING64-CV-ASSY,
open the
forward and disconnect the two heater
cable connectors.

Be careful not to hit the
PCB-ASSY-SNS1 (See 6.5.4).
Connectors
Right side interior Heater
Heater
Left side interior
6-108
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.11.3 PLATEN64-CV-ASSY, PLATEN-CV54-UNIT

PAPER-GUIDE-DELIVERY-CV54-UNIT, STAY(Air Duct)Front Side 64 is called
STAY-AIRDUCT-FS-CV54, and PLATEN64-CV-ASSY is called PLATEN-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
1. Remove EDGEGUARDASSY(L)-CV
and EDGE-GUARDASSY(R)-CV
(See 6.11.4).
2. Remove
(see 6.11.1).
3. Remove the two PLATEN64-CV-ASSY

cable connectors and pass them PLATEN64 -CV-ASSY
through the hole of
STAY(AirDuct)FrontSide64.
STAY(Air Duct)Front Side 64 hole
Connectors
4. Unscrew the one screw on the

STAY(Air Duct)Front Side 64 side of STAY(Air Duct)Front Side 64 hole
the ground wire connecting
PLATEN64-CV-ASSY to
STAY(AirDuct)Front Side 64.
PLATEN64-CV-ASSY
Ground wire screw
STAY(Air Duct)Front Side 64 Connector
6-109
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Unscrew the screws (IP-5620: 27,

IP-5520: 21) of PLATEN64-CV-ASSY
to detach it.
PLATEN64-CV-ASSY
PLATEN64-CV-ASSY
Thermistor
CABLE(PlatenThermistor)-ASSY
Note
There are lines of screws that do not have to be removed among the screws aligned in
units of 3 (total of 45 for IP-5620, 39 for IP-5520).
Screws to remove

Be careful not to hit the PCB-ASSY-SNS1 (See 6.5.4).
6 - 11 0
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.11.4 EDGEGUARDASSY(L)-CV, EDGEGUARDASSY(R)-CV

PLATEN64-CV-ASSY is called PLATEN-CV54-UNIT.
[Disassembly]
COVER(FU)-CV, and COVER(FB)-CV
(See 6.3).
2. Loosen the two screws that fix the EDGEGUARDASSY(R)-CV

Stopper(EdgeGuard) and slide the it to EDGEGUARDASSY(L)-CV
the back.
3. Slide EDGEGUARDASSY(L)-CV and

EDGEGUARDASSY(R)-CV to the left
and remove them from the
PLATEN64-CV-ASSY.
PLATEN64 ASSY
Screws
Stopper(EdgeGuard)
6 - 111
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.12 Disassembling and Reassembling TAKE UP REEL UNIT,

FEEDING-UNIT
6.12.1 SUPPORT(T-ROLLER-R) Replacement Procedure

[Disassembly]
* Remove the opposite SUPPORT(T-ROLLER-L) in the same way.
1. Among the four screws of

SUPPORT(TROLLER-R), unscrew the SUPPORT(T-ROLLER-R)
lower inside two screws and loosen the
upper outside two screws to remove
SUPPORT(T-ROLLER-R) and
SPRING (ROLLERCAP)-R from
PLATE(SIDE-R).
PLATE(SIDE-R)
SUPPORT(T-ROLLER-R)
PLATE(SIDE-R)

SUPPORT(T-ROLLER-R)
Assemble SPRING(ROLLER-CAP)-R to
SUPPORT(T-ROLLER-R) temporarily in
advance.
SPRING(ROLLER-CAP)-R
6 - 11 2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.12.2 FLANGE(2-INCH)
[Disassembly]
* Remove the opposite FLANGE in the same way.
1. Remove the E-ring and then remove

FLANGE(2-INCH)
FLANGE(2-INCH) and parallel pin.
E-ring
SHAFT(DRIVE)
Parallel pin
6 - 11 3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.12.3 MOTOR-UNIT
[Disassembly]
1. Disconnect the cable from the clamp

Clamp at the bottom of
(one point) at the bottom of
FRAME-UNIT
FRAME-UNIT and the two clamps on
the PLATE(SIDE-R) side, and move Clamps on the
TAKE UP REEL UNIT to the left side. PLATE(SIDE-R) side
2. Remove FLANGE(2-INCH)
(see 6.12.2).
TAKE UP REEL UNIT

COVER(MOTOR) to detach it from
GEAR-BOX. GEAR-BOX
4. Unscrew the two screws of COVER(MOTOR)

MOTOR-UNIT to remove it from
GEAR-BOX.
GEAR-BOX
MOTOR-UNIT
MOTOR-UNIT connector
5. Disconnect the MOTOR-UNIT
connector.

MOTOR-UNIT
Reassemble MOTOR-UNIT so that
CABLE (TakeUp3)-ASSY does not touch
the gear or shaft.
6 - 11 4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.12.4 CABLE(TU-Switch)-ASSY
[Disassembly]

COVER(MOTOR) to detach it from
GEAR-BOX (see 6.12.3).
2. Disconnect the CABLE

(TU-Switch)-ASSY connector.
GEAR-BOX
Nut
3. Remove the one nut and one conical

spring washer securing CABLE
(TU-Switch)-ASSY to remove it from Conical spring washer
GEAR-BOX. CABLE(TU-Switch)-ASSY

Reassemble CABLE (TU-Switch)-ASSY
CABLE(TU-Switch)-ASSY connector
so that CABLE (TakeUp3)-ASSY does
not touch the gear or shaft.
6.12.5 TORQUE LIMITER

[Disassembly]
1. Remove the E-ring and then remove

FLANGE(2-INCH) and parallel pin
(see 6.12.2).

COVER(MOTOR) to remove it from

MOTOR-UNIT to remove it from
4. Disconnect the MOTOR-UNIT

connector (see 6.12.3).
6 - 11 5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Remove the E-ring from

SHAFT(LIMITER).
SHAFT(LIMITER)
E-ring
6. Unscrew the four screws of GEAR-BOX

GEAR-BOX to remove it from
PLATE(SIDE-R).
SHAFT(DRIVE)
7. Remove the E-ring from SHAFT(LIMITER)

SHAFT(DRIVE).
8. Remove the E-ring from E-rings

SHAFT(LIMITER).
9. Remove SHAFT(DRIVE)-ASSY and

SHAFT(LIMITER)-ASSY from
GEARBOX.
10. Pull the snap pin out of Snap pin

SHAFT(LIMITER) and remove
TORQUE LIMITER from
SHAFT(LIMITER).

Reassemble TORQUE LIMITER so that
CABLE(TakeUp3)-ASSY does not touch
the gear or shaft. TORQUE LIMITER SHAFT(LIMITER)
6 - 11 6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.12.6 PHOTO-IC-ASSY
There are two types of slack sensor, one for the take-up reel unit without rear sensor, and one
for he take-up reel unit with rear sensor. For the characteristics of each type, see 8.2 6)
Take-up reel unit.
< For the type without rear sensor >
[Disassembly]
1. Disconnect the PHOTO-IC-ASSY

connector. PLATE(SIDE-R)

PHOTO-IC-ASSY to remove it from
PLATE(SIDE-R).
PHOTO-IC-ASSY
Connector
< For the type with rear sensor >
[Disassembly]
1. Disconnect the connector on the front

sensor plate, and remove the cable Clamp
from the clamp.
2. Remove the two set screws securing

the front sensor plate, and remove the
front sensor plate from the PLATE
(SIDE-R).
Connector
PLATE (SIDE-R)
6 - 11 7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.12.7 IR-LED-ASSY
There are two types of slack sensor, one for the take-up reel unit without rear sensor, and one
for he take-up reel unit with rear sensor. For the characteristics of each type, see 8.2 6)
Take-up reel unit.
< For the type without rear sensor >
[Disassembly]
1. Disconnect the IR-LED-ASSY

connector. Printer stand
PLATE(SIDE-R)

IR-LED-ASSY to remove it from the
printer stand.
Connector
IR-LED-ASSY
< For the type with rear sensor >

The part corresponding to the IR-LED-ASSY is the rear sensor plate.
[Disassembly]
1. Disconnect the connector on the rear Printer rear side

sensor plate.
Sensor fixture
2. Remove the set screw securing the
rear sensor plate, and remove the rear
sensor plate. Connector
Printer front side

Rear sensor plate
6 - 11 8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.12.8 SWITCH(RollEnd)-ASSY
[Disassembly]
1. Remove the connector of the SWITCH

(RollEnd)-ASSY connected to the SWITCH(RollEnd)-ASSY connector
bottom of the FRAME-UNIT.
2. Unscrew the two screws securing

PLATE(FEE-DING)RT1 to FEEGING-UNIT-02
FEEGING-UNIT-02 to remove PLATE
(FEEDING) RT1.
PLATE(FEE-DING)RT1
PLATE(FEE-DING)RT1
FEEGING-UNIT-02
3. Unscrew two screws securing

SWITCH(RollEnd)-ASSY to
FEEGING-UNIT-02 to remove SWITCH(RollEnd)-ASSY
SWITCH (RollEnd)-ASSY.
ネジ
6 - 11 9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.13 BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY and REASSEMBLY
6.13.1 CAP-LOUVERb-FS Replacement Procedure

[Disassembly]
1. Unscrew the four screws fixing CAP-LOUVERb-FS

CAP-LOUVERb-FS and pull them out
in the direction indicated by the arrow.
6.13.2 BLOWER3-FS Replacement Procedure

[Disassembly]
1. Unscrew the one screw fixing the

CAP-LOUVERb-FS
BLOWER3-FS to be replaced.
2. Unscrew the screws (one for each)

fixing the BLOWER3-FS located on
the left side of the BLOWER3-FS to be
replaced.
3. Press the two hooks on the top of the

far left BLOWER3-FS, then rotate and
remove it. In the same manner,
remove BLOWER3-FS in succession
on the left side of the one to be
replaced.
6-120
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.13.3 FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) Replacement Procedure

[Disassembly]
1. Remove CAP-LOUVERb-FS
(see 6.13.1).
2. Slide the FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) in the

horizontal direction and remove it. FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN)
Notes
- Install the FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) in
the correct direction. (The projection
side needs to be installed to the right.)
- Make sure to install the

FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) in contact with
the Plate-Fan120(74).
Right side
Plate-Fan120(74)
Two surfaces in
contact
6-121
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.13.4 FAN(MEDIA COOL) ASSY HV Replacement Procedure

[Disassembly]
1. Turn OFF the printer and remove the

FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) following Plate-Fan120(74)
6.13.1 and 6.13.3 procedures.
FAN(MEDIA COOL) ASSY HV
2. Remove the connector connecting the

FAN(MEDIA COOL) ASSY HV and the
cable.
3. Unscrew the two screws fixing the

FAN(MEDIA COOL) ASSY HV.
Note
Install the FAN(MEDIA COOL) ASSY HV
in the correct direction. (The side without
the manufacturer's indication needs to
be installed to the front. )
6-122
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6.13.5 CABLE(MFAN-IF2)-ASSY(LV3) Replacement Procedure

[Disassembly]
1. Turn OFF the printer. Open the front Front cover

cover and next the maintenance cover.
Maintenance cover
2. Remove the connectors of the two
cables inside the cover.
CABLE(MFAN-IF)
Pull out the COVER(FRD)-CV -ASSY(LV3)
CABLE(MFAN-IF2)-ASSY(LV3)
connector through the hole at the CABLE(MFAN-IF)
bottom of the COVER(FRD)-CV. -ASSY(LV3)
CABLE(MFAN-IF2)-ASSY(LV3)
3. Remove the far left

FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) following the
6.13.1 and 6.13.3 procedures. CABLE(MFAN-IF2)-ASSY(LV3)
Remove the connectors of the two

cables inside.
Unscrew the one screw fixing the

CABLE(MFAN-IF2)-ASSY(LV3).
CABLE(MFAN)-ASSY(LV3)
6-123
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 8 Operation Mechanism
SECTION 7 ADJUSTMENT
This section describes adjustments carried out during on-site parts replacement or
maintenance work.
7-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.1 Height adjustment of CARRIAGE (BASEHEAD)
This adjustment is required when the

PLATEN64-CV-ASSY(IP-5620)/PLATEN-CV54-UNIT(IP-5520) is disassembled.
Jig: PLATE-ADJUST-CR (four pieces in one set) M3 x 8 screws (two units)
1. Open the capping unit (see 3.4.2

PH.MAIN - UNCAP CARRIAGE).
2. Check that the capping unit is opened,

then fit the left side of the carriage to
the center metal sheet manually.
Put the forced heater mode to on and
heat up the platen heater to 40℃. (See
Center metal sheet
3.4.7 Heater) No specification for the
rear heater and the preheater.
3. Set the position of pressure roller

up/down lever to normal pressure.
CARRIAGE (left side)

4. This is the case when LEVER-UD (two
locations) on the two-step height
changeover mechanism is set
horizontally by the user. (High).
Loosen the two screw knobs, raise the
lever up (low side, two locations) and
tighten the two screw knobs. If you
cannot turn them with fingers, use a
coin or others. Check whether there is LEVER-UD
backlash in LEVER-UD or not.
Screw knob
LEVER-UD
Screw knob
7-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Loosen the two screws that fix each of

SHIELD(HB)
the SHIELD(HB) on the right and left
sides of the carriage and remove the
two SHIELD(HB).
SHIELD(HB)
6. Insert PLATE-ADJUST-CR under the

carriage (four corners).
Note
Be sure to execute these procedures to
prevent a head from damage caused by
dropout of the carriage.
7. Fix the head base and PLATE-UD with Tapped hole for M3 screw
two M3 screws. Loosen the two screw
knobs, open
COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN) and then
loosen the four CARRIAGE securing
screws.
However, if you find backlash during

step 4., pick up the pin of PLATE-UD
and lift it while fixing the head base
and PLATE-UD with two M3 screws.
Tapped hole for M3 screw
Pin
7-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8. Close COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN).
9. Set the four units PLATE-ADJUST-CR

to the target height, tighten the two
screw knobs, open
COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN), and
tighten the four CARRIAGE securing
screws.
10. Close COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN) and

check the height. When you confirm
that the height is between the first
stage to the fourth stage of
PLATE-ADJUST-CR, open
COVER(CARRIAGE-2FAN), remove
the two M3 screws and close
If one of the height is the fifth stage of

PLATE-ADJUST-CR or lower, or if
PLATE-ADJUST-CR cannot be
inserted, repeat the procedure from
the step 7.
11. Remove PLATE-ADJUST-CR (four

units).
12. Adjust the height of

PLATE(CARRIAGE) in the capping
unit.(see 7.4)
7-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.2 BELT(SUS)64/BELT-SUS-CV54 Tension Adjustment

With IP-5520, BELT(SUS)64 is called BELT-SUS-CV54, and COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV is called
COVER-FRONT-CV54-UNIT.
This adjustment is necessary when BELT(SUS)64 is replaced or loosened during

disassembly of other parts.
Jig: BeltTension-Jig
COVER(COVER-FU)-CV,
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV, and
COVER(SIDE-R)-CV. (See 6.3).
2. While pushing the horizontal center of Y-RAIL-UNIT

BELT(SUS)64
BELT(SUS)64 with the BeltTension-Jig,
read the value on the jig when
BELT(SUS)64 reaches Y-RAIL-UNIT.
Tension for IP-5620: 175 - 200 gf

Tension for IP-5520: 135 - 165 gf
BeltTension-Jig
If the value does not meet the

specification, turn the BELT(SUS)64
tension adjustment screws to adjust
the tension. BELT(SUS)64 tension adjustment screws
BELT(SUS)64
Following movement Pulley Assy
Note
- When the BELT(SUS)64 tension is changed with the BELT(SUS)64 tension adjustment
screws, move the carriage manually between Y-RAIL-UNIT left end and the capping
position back and forth two to three times to smoothen BELT(SUS)64 motion, and then
measure the belt tension.
- Adjust the belt tension so that BELT(SUS)64 does not move up or down on Following
movement Pulley Assy while the carriage is moving.
7-5
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.3 Timing Belt (Y-MOTOR-ASSY Belt) Tension Adjustment
This adjustment is necessary when Y-MOTOR-ASSY, PULLEY (Y-MOTOR), Timing belt,

BELT(SUS)64, or Following movement Pulley Assy is disassembled.
Jig: Tension meter
(see 6.3).
2. Loosen the four PLATE(Y-MOTOR)

securing screws. PLATE(Y-MOTOR) Timing belt
3. Hook the tension meter hook into the

hole of PLATE(Y-MOTOR), pull the Tension meter Tension meter hook
tension meter, and tighten the four
PLATE(Y-MOTOR) screws at the
specified tension.
Tension : 41N ±2N

（5kgf ±0.2kgf）
PLATE (Y-MOTOR) hole
7-6
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.4 CAPPING-UNIT-CV Cam Position Adjustment

The cam position must be adjusted when CAPPING-UNIT-CV, SWITCH(CAP-ASSY) or

LEVER(CAP)-ASSY is replaced.
1. Remove COVER(SIDE-R)-CV (see

6.3.5), and open Some parts are omitted in the figure
COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV, below for clearer explanation
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV.
2. Remove SCREW(CAM-LOCK) from BRACKET(GEAR)

BRACKET(GEAR) and open the upper
half of LEVER(CAP)-ASSY.
3. Lower the cap from the operation

panel. When the extended line of the
positioning line of GEAR(CAM) comes
within the range of BRACKET(GEAR)
notch when viewed from the right side,
no adjustment is needed. If the
extended line is outside the range,
select CAP UP/DOWN POS on the BRACKET(CAM)
operation panel, and enter an
Right side view of capping unit
adjustment value. Select a positive
value when the positioning line is
below the range of notch or select a
negative value when it is above the
range.
4. Close COVER(COVER-FU)-CV,
COVER(COVER-FB)-CV and Notch Positioning line
COVER(FRONT)ASSY-CV, and then
perform initialization.
5. Lower the cap from the operation

panel, and check that the positioning
line is within the range of notch. Raise
the cap from the operation panel, and
install SCREW(CAM-LOCK).
Enlarged view of the circle in the figure above

(example after adjustment)
7-7
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.5 Correcting the Cap Position
Correct the position of cap for the head in capping unit part (home position).
<Parameters>
+/-5 mm, 0.1 mm/step

+ : move to the head maintenance side
- : move to the capping unit side
(Correction method)
1. Press the keys in the order of , INK MEDIA REG

, , and then
input the password (see 3.2 MEDIA M.ADJ
Maintenance Mode) to enter the
maintenance mode.
2. Press the key twice.

PRINTER SETUP
ADJUST HEATER
3. Press key to enter in the # NOZZLE PRINT

ADJUST menu.
>EXECUTE
4. Press key to select CAP POS #CAP POS ADJUST

ADJUST.
>
5. Press key to move the carriage

to the cap position adjustment position.
7-8
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6. Enter an adjustment value so that the

shield on the side of the first head
installed on the carriage is on the
same location as the inner part of the
rip part of the sixth head cap.
7. Press key to enter in the CAP #CAP POSITION

POSITION setting menu.
>+0.0mm
8. Check visually that the position of cap

for the head is at the center.
Input the adjustment value with ,

, , and keys.
(-) Capping unit side

(+) Wiping unit side
Note
When 0 is set for the adjustment value,
capping is not executed.
9. The correction operation is executed

depending on the input adjustment
value by opening/closing the front
cover.
Note
Move the carriage on the platen when
the cover is closed.
10. Repeat the steps 4 to 9 to correct so

that the position of cap for the head
comes as shown in step 6.
7-9
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
7.6 Correcting Wiping Position
Correct the relative position of the wiping unit with the print heads.
Be sure to correct the wiping position according to the following procedure when a guard
plate is installed on a print head.
◆Caution when correcting the wiping position

Correct the wiping position following the procedure below for all the print heads whether a
guard plate is installed or not.
Guard plate on a print head Wiper blade (type S)
The edge of the blade needs to be

adjusted to the head’s nozzle.
0.5mm
The edge of the wiper blade needs to be adjusted to the nozzle position.
The wiper blade cannot be adjusted visually to the head’s nozzle position. First align the wiper blade’s edge
with the edge of the head base, and then adjust by moving the position 5 mm. The detailed procedure is as
follows.
7-10
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Removing the COVER(FB)-CV

Before correcting the position, remove the COVER(FB)-CV so that the wiping unit becomes
visible. Remove the COVER(FB)-CV without triggering off the interlock switch.
1. Open the COVER(FB)-CV on the cap

side without folding it.
2. Pull the hook on the middle-right (the

arrow on the photo) toward you, and
then slide the COVER(FB)-CV to the
right to remove it.
3. Close the cover after removing the

COVER(FB)-CV to complete the
preparatory procedure.
4. Press the keys in the order of , INK MEDIA REG

, , and then
input the password (see 3.2 MEDIA M.ADJ
Maintenance Mode) to enter the
maintenance mode.
7 - 11
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5. Press the key twice. PRINTER SETUP

ADJUST HEATER
6. Press the key to enter in the

#NOZZLE PRINT
ADJUST menu.
#EXECUTE
7. Press the key to enter the MOVE #MOVE CARRIAGE

CARRIAGE menu.
>HOME
8. Move the carriage to WIPE using #MOVE CARRIAGE

MOVE CARRIAGE.
>WIPE
9. Press the key and then the

PRINTER SETUP
key to exit the ADJUST menu.
ADJUST HEATER
10. Press the key once. MNFG-PRN SENSORS

VOLT MOTORS
11. Press the key to enter the

#PH HEATERS
MOTORS menu.
>OFF
12. Press the key three times to

#PUMP/WIPE MOTOR
enter PUMP/WIPE MOTOR.
>OFF
13. Press the key and then the #PUMP/WIPE MOTOR

key twice.
*BACKWARDS
14. Press the key twice to start the

wipe operation.
15. Press the key and then the #PUMP/WIPE MOTOR

key.
>OFF
16. Press the key to stop the wipe

operation.
7-12
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Watch the wiper blade movement and stop the wipe operation when the blade has finished
wiping the head surface. (If the blade did not stop at an adequate position, return to step 13
and perform the procedure again.)
<Parameters>
±5 mm, 0.1 mm/step
＋ : the carriage moves toward the head maintenance side
－ : the carriage moves toward the capping unit side
17. When the blade has stop as shown in #WIPE POSITION

the photo above, correct the wiping
position so that the blade edge just >+0.0mm
comes into contact with the edge of
the protrusion on the head base.
Enter WIPE POSITION in the ADJUST
menu, and input the adjustment value.
18. Move the carriage to HOME using #MOVE CARRIAGE

MOVE CARRIAGE.
>HOME
7-13
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
19. Move the carriage again to WIPE

using MOVE CARRIAGE.
Confirm the position as explained in
step 17. If the blade has just entered
into contact with the protrusion,
continue the procedure.
If the position still needs correction,
return to step 17 to make further
adjustment.
20. Add 0.5 mm to the adjustment value #WIPE POSITION

entered in step 17 and input the new
value in WIPE POSITION. >+ 0.7mm
(For example, if the adequate
adjustment value in step 17 was -1.2
mm, then the value to input is -0.7
mm.)
7-14
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 8 OPERATION MECHANISM
This section describes the operation mechanisms of the media feeding system, carriage
system and the ink system as well as the operations of electrical control system, engine
controller firmware, and blower unit.
8.1 Overview of System Operation Mechanism
The media roll set in this system is fed by the grit roller and passes through the platen in
direction X. Inks of various colors are injected from the piezo-type head which passes through
the platen block in direction Y and the printing is performed. On the platen, a suction fan sucks
the media to keep an appropriate distance between the media and the head.
The heads are mounted on the carriage and are operated by the carriage motor via the steel
belt to move back and forth horizontally to the printer.
The position of the heads is detected using a linear scale, linear encoder and home position sensor.
To prevent damages by staining of the head surfaces, drying by leaving the heads not used for
a long period, etc., a service station is equipped.
The service station cleans the head surface with a wiper and protects the head surface by
aspiration and capping using the capping unit. Cleaning operation is executed when a certain
length has been printed.
In addition, capping is executed automatically by the capping unit when printing is completed.
The ink that is fed to the head is supplied directly from the ink cartridge via a tube.
The printer is equipped with a preheater for media pre-heating on the paper feeding side, a
print heater for ink penetration and fixing below the platen, and a after heater for drying on the
media output side.
The media feed unit and media output unit are mounted with a media feeding sensor and the
media output sensor respectively for media jam detection, etc.
Figure 8.1 Overview of system operation mechanism
8-15
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.2 Media Feeding System
The media feeding system comprises the following units from 1) to 6) as shown in figures 8.2
and 8.3.
<Feeding system mechanism X axis> (sub-scanning)
Figure 8.2 Feeding system mechanism (X axis)
<Feeding system mechanism Y axis> (main scanning)
Figure 8.3 Feeding system mechanism (Y axis)
8-16
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1) Media feed unit

The media feed unit can perform 2-way feeding of media roll and cut media. The media feed
unit can be operated from the rear side.
- When using cut media, remove the media roll and set the cut media by aligning it
to the guideline of the rear paper guide.
- The pressure roller up/down lever is a mechanism for canceling the pressure
roller grip when setting the media roll or cut media. The lever sensor is a photo
sensor installed near the pressure roller up/down lever on the right side frame,
and it detects opening/closing of the lever. When grip is cancelled, media cannot
be fed. Thus machine operation is stopped when grip cancellation is detected. In
addition, as the media may has been reset when grip is detected again, it is also
used as a signal for executing media detection sequence.
- Specification of media supply to media roll or cut media is executed from the
operation panel. Specification of media type is also executed on the operation
panel.
- The media feeding sensor is a reflection-type photo sensor installed in the media
feed unit that lets the engine controller firmware recognizes the media status via
detecting the media existence by reflection on the media back surface.
2) Driving block
The driving block comprises a X motor (media feeding motor), grit roller, pressure roller and
lever. The media feeding motor is a stepping motor for feeding the media, which is controlled
by the engine controller firmware. When this motor is operated, the grid roller rotates and feeds
the media that is gripped by the pressure roller. The pressure roller is set to grip or cancel by
the lever.
3) Platen, suction fan

When the media is fed to the platen, air is sucked through the holes on the platen to stick the
media onto the platen and prevent it from floating and coming in contact with the print heads.
Four suction fans are installed. These four fans can be operated independently to match the
media width. Sucked air is released from the lower part of the front paper guide.
4) Paper guide, media output sensor

The paper guide is the guiding plate with a curb used for media output to prevent folding of the
media printed in the platen unit. The media output sensor is a reflection-type photo sensor
installed in the media outlet that lets the engine controller firmware recognizes the media status
via detecting the media existence by reflection on the media back surface.
8-17
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
5) Cover SW, Interlock SW

These four switches installed on the front cover are the cover switches and interlock switches
for detecting the cover open/close status. A set of one cover switch and one interlock switch is
provided on each end of the cover. When the cover is opened, the engine controller firmware
detects that the cover switch is OFF and executes error processing while turning OFF the
interlock switch to forcibly turn OFF the P36LEC power supply generated on the LEECV board,
and +24V power supply. Thus the carriage and other driving parts are forced to stop.
6) Take-up reel unit

There are the two following types of take-up reel unit.
Type without rear sensor Type with rear sensor
Always use the firmware version 2.50 or higher with the take-up reel unit with rear sensor. Also,
do not forget to make setting for TUR UNIT in the SETUP menu matching the type of take-up
reel unit used.
Compared to the type without rear sensor (previous model), the slack rolling (outward take-up)
operation is more stable when using the take-up reel unit with rear sensor.
However, since the rear sensor plate is installed on the stand beam, the flange movable range
on the sliding side is limited. Consequently, paper tube of 750 mm or more must be used with
media of 750 mm or less than in width (e.g. 36-inch tube with 24-inch media). (See the figure
below.)
8-18
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
The take-up reel unit comprises a fixed side unit, a sliding side unit, and a slack sensor.
The media is fixed to the scroller tube with tape. With the type without rear sensor, the media is
set so that it passes over the sensor in the right side part of the take-up unit. With the type with
rear sensor, the media is set so that a slack forms between the rear sensor and the front sensor.
These sensors are called slack sensors. When the light path of the sensors is cut off by the
media, the engine controller firmware recognizes that there is a slack in the media, and the unit
takes up a certain amount of media.
(1) Supports tension rolling

In addition to slack rolling mode, this unit also support tension rolling mode in
which the media is taken up under certain tension. To switch the rolling mode,
the operation mode needs to be switched from the operation panel.
(2) Supports both take-up directions

Both inward and outward take-up directions are supported. The take-up
direction can be selected regardless of the take-up mode. The take-up
direction is changed using the switch installed on the take-up unit.
(3) ON/OFF
The take-up reel unit is turned OFF by setting the inward/outward take-up
direction switch lever to the center.
Turning the switch to the front : Outward take-up

Turning the switch to the rear : Inward take-up
Turning the switch to the front : Outward take-up

Turning the switch to the rear : Inward take-up
8-19
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.3 Carriage System
The carriage system comprises the following units from 1) to 6):
1) Carriage motor
It is a stepping motor installed within the left cover of the printer. This motor, used for
moving the carriage back and forth horizontally, supports speed control from the minimum
to the maximum speed.
The motor position is detected by a linear encoder installed on the main unit Y-rail (ink
discharge timing is controlled by the linear encoder signals).
2) Carriage
The carriage is the printing unit installed to the Y-rail of the main unit via the bearings and
is operated by the carriage motor via the steel belt. This unit is equipped with a carriage
board, six heads, an edge sensor, a linear encoder, and a head cooling fan.
3) Carriage board
It is the board mounted on the carriage, and it executes the following functions:
- Assigns the print data transmitted from the engine control board to each
head.
- Performs output of the thermistor installed on the carriage (head
temperature) and edge detection of the media, and at the same time,
outputs the signal of the liner encoder to the engine control board.
- Controls the head discharge timing based on the linear encoder signals.
4) Edge sensor
Installed on the side of the carriage, it detects the existence of media on the platen and the
media edges on both sides. The CPU of the engine control board controls the overall
printing by using data as the media standard for print start position, detection of skew, etc.
The signal from the edge sensor is transmitted from the carriage board to the engine
control board and detected by CPU.
5) Home position sensor

It is the photo sensor installed at the Y-rail home position of the product. The engine
controller cannot recognize the carriage position immediately after turning ON the power
supply, so the carriage is first moved to the position where the home position sensor turns
ON (home position), detected as the initial position of the carriage.
8-20
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6) T-fence (linear scale), linear encoder

It is the sensor (photo interrupter) attached on the top of the carriage. Since the absolute
position of the carriage must always be recognized for printing, T-fence (linear scale)
covers the range of carriage movement. It is the linear encoder sensor that reads this
linear scale and generates a 2-phase clock with different phases. The engine controller
firmware always recognizes the absolute position of the carriage by counting the pulse
from this sensor. In addition, the signals detected by the linear encoder are also used for
checking the position of the carriage motor. Ink is discharged from the head nozzles to
match the output signals from this sensor as well.
8-21
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.4 Ink System
The ink system comprises the ink cartridge, cartridge BOX, ink supply pump, ink supply tube,
capping unit, wiping unit, carriage board, engine control board and the ink system control
firmware as shown in figures 8.4 and 8.5.
Figure 8.4 Overview of ink system structure
Figure 8.5 Conceptual diagram of ink system
8-22
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
1) Head
The heads used in this printer are driven by electrostriction transducer, and the ink is
sprayed by applying signal voltage pulse on the piezo elements to distort these elements
and change the volume of the ink pressure room.
This product uses a 254-nozzle head per color with 6 colors (6 heads) aligned, which
addresses high-speed printing.
- Drive frequency
Drive frequency is 18.5kHz per nozzle for standard mode.
- Temperature control
Drive voltage is controlled depending on the temperature since the ink viscosity
changes with the temperature.
- Air damper
To prevent head meniscus damage by movement of the ink inside the ink tube due to
carriage acceleration, a damper is provided to mitigate the pressure fluctuations.
- Head heater
The heaters mounted on the heads put the heads to the specified temperature during
printing. They are controlled by the engine firmware that uses temperature data
detected by the head thermistor.
2) Ink cartridge
Ink is filled in a laminated film pack. The ink capacity is 500mL for each color, and the pack
is set into the plastic cartridge (case). A board with an IC chip is mounted at the surface
near the edge of the cartridge. Various IDs are stored in the memory of this chip during
production, and various Logs are stored from the printer while in use.
- Memory ID : Ink type ID (color)
- Date of manufacture
- Printer record LOG : Ink consumption
3) Cartridge BOX
It is the slot for installing the ink cartridge, and Y, M, C, K, Lm and Lc are equipped from
the left when seen from the back of the product. The cartridge BOX includes mis-insertion
prevention mechanism, ink pin and ink relay board.
- Ink pin
By inserting the pin into the spout of the ink cartridge pack, the ink is supplied to the
ink tube.
- Ink relay board (PCB-ASSY-B1)

A relay board for reading/writing the memory in the ink cartridge.
8-23
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
4) Ink supply tube

The ink from the ink cartridge set into this printer is supplied to the head unit from the ink
tube via the ink pin and filter. The 20 μ filter installed immediately after the ink pin traps the
rubber slug that is generated when the ink passes through the rubber tube at the ink pack
spout in the ink cartridge. When ink cartridges are set, ink from each ink cartridge is sent
to each head by the ink filling operation.
5) Capping unit
- Structure
The capping unit is located on the right side of the printer. The operating block of the
capping unit comprises one pump motor, one cam driven pulse motor for determining
the capping status and a switch for detecting the reference for the cam position. The
pump motor rotates the pump in normal rotation (aspiration) and rotates the wiper in
reverse rotation. Each operation is regulated by a one-way clutch so that the other
operation cannot be executed. Furthermore, the three capping statuses of cap open,
air release and cap close are determined by the cam operation, and the cap open
position is detected by the switch so that it is used as the origin for cam position. The
three statuses of the capping unit are switched by the operation angle of the pulse
motor that drives the cam with reference to the origin.
- Function
When the carriage is at its home position, it interlocks with the pump motor to perform
capping and aspirate the ink. It also protects the head surface by capping at the
carriage home position. A porous sheet is attached inside the cap rubber and this
sheet prevents ink bubbling inside the cap when ink is aspired so that the ink inside
the cap is aspired clearly during suction.
- Ink pump
The ink pump adopts the rotary tube pump mechanism in which the tube is squeezed
in a rotary style. The ink pump squeeze the tube and aspirates the ink by rotating the
cam roller via the pump motor that also operates the pump. The pump tube is
continuously squeezed by the cam roller and there is no back run of the ink. The
waste ink that was aspired in the pump block is ejected into the waste ink bottle.
- Air release valve

The air release valve is opened/closed by the cam operation in a similar fashion to
the cam for determining the capping status. The rubber that faces the air release
valve opens/closes the end orifice of the tube that is connected to the cap rubber. The
air release valve has a spring that prevents air release and maintains sealing against
the outer air by its pressure. When ink is aspired in ink aspiration operation and the
pressure is mitigated, the cap rubber is filled with ink. Meniscus is formed at the head
nozzle by removing (aspiring) this ink. Conversely, if this operation is not performed,
meniscus is damaged by opening the cap which is filled with ink. The ink and air
inside the cap are aspired together by executing aspiration (suction) with the air
release valve open to remove the ink inside cap and form meniscus.
8-24
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6) Wiping unit
- Structure
The wiping unit is located on the right side of the printer. The wiper blade is attached
to a holder on a chain. The wiping unit rotates the chain with the wiper blade and
wipes the head surface with the edge of the blade. Wiper rotation is executed by
transmitting the rotation of the pump motor (DC motor) inside the capping unit. The
direction of motor rotation is in reverse rotation to the pump driving.
- Function
The wiper blade cleans the head surface and prevents bending of ink jet. The sponge
cleans the wiper blade that cleaned the head surface. The wiper blade is rotated by
motor operation.
7) Waste ink bottle

The waste ink bottle is a HDPE (high density polyethylene) bottle for collecting the waste
ink aspired by the pump, and its maximum capacity is approximately 1.0L.
8-25
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.5 Various Functions for Printing
1) Cleaning sequence
The following cleaning sequences are included in this printer for optimal printing. Cleaning
is mainly executed by the capping unit, wiping unit, and ink system control firmware.
Flushing is executed by the head unit and control firmware.
- Manual cleaning (Normal / Strong)

To execute this sequence, operate the menu displayed on the operation panel. Use
this sequence when clogged nozzles are not eliminated after performing automatic
cleaning included in this device.
- Automatic cleaning
This sequence is automatically performed when printing.
- Cleaning during idle period (fill cap)

This sequence is automatically performed during idle period of this device in order to
provide optimal printing condition for the next printing job.
- Interval, time required, ink consumption
Function Interval Time Ink

required consumption
Manual cleaning Approx. Approx.

For every job
(Normal) 6.32 min 2.2 ml/color
Manual cleaning Approx. Approx.
For every job
(Strong) 8.9 min 6.5 ml/color
For GX ink:
Approx.
Automatic cleaning When start printing: For every 1566 scans Approx. 0.1 ml/color
(Cleaning mode: When finish printing: For every 1740 scans 5.23 min For IX ink:
INKSAVE Approx.
CLEANING) 0.4 ml/color
When start printing: For every 3306 scans Approx. Approx.
When finish printing: For every 3480 scans 6.32 min 2.2 ml/color
Automatic cleaning
(Cleaning mode:
FINE CLEANING)
Fill cap
The fill cap operation is performed seven Approx. Approx.
Cleaning during idle days after the printer enters standby mode. 0.14 min 5.1 ml/color
period After that, half fill cap is performed every 7 Half fill cap
days. Approx. Approx.
0.08 min 2.2 ml/color
8-26
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
2) Head drive voltage control

- Setting of the head drive voltage rank
The drive voltage for the head is set for each color to maintain the specified density
and for stability of ink discharge. Since the drive voltage varies depending on
manufacturing conditions of the head (lot, material properties, processing), the
voltage is labeled on each head during production.
When the head is attached to the printer, values are input for this voltage and stored
in the EEPROM on the LEECV board of the printer.
- Temperature control
Ink viscosity increases as the temperature becomes lower, and decreases as the
temperature becomes higher. The energy for ink discharge must be increased when
viscosity increases, and conversely, the energy can be smaller as the viscosity
decreases. To control this discharge energy, the voltage is changed. The control
method is digital control. The temperature of the PZT element in the head is detected
by the thermistor, and head is operated with the specified drive voltage for the
detected temperature with control of the engine controller firmware. The parameters
for this temperature control have been provided in a table, and values in the table are
corrected for each head voltage rank.
3) Head position adjustment

A function in the control firmware to adjust the dot spotting position in the main scanning
direction.
It corrects the shift in dot spotting position between the six color heads caused by
fluctuation in main head attachment position and ink discharge speed. Correction is
executed by using the dot spotting position for color K head as the reference and delaying
(or advancing) the ink discharge timing for heads of other colors.
4) Bidirectional adjustment
A function in the control firmware to correct the dot spotting position in the main scanning
direction. In bidirectional printing, the dot spotting position is matched for the forward and
backward directions for each head. Adjustment is performed by using the dot spotting
position of the forward direction as reference and delaying (or advancing) the ink
discharge timing for backward direction.
5) Nozzle position adjustment

A function in the control firmware to correct the dot spotting position in the subscanning
direction. It corrects the shift in dot spotting position between the six color heads caused
by fluctuation in main head attachment position and head size. Correction is performed by
changing the nozzle to be used in printing.
8-27
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
6) Print head R/L adjustment

A function in the control firmware to correct the dot spotting position in the main scanning
direction. The dot spotting position is matched for the R line and the L line for each head.
Correction is performed by using the dot spotting position of the R line as reference and
adjusting the ink discharge timing for the L line.
7) Sensor (side) position adjustment

A function in the control firmware to correct the print start position in the width (side)
direction of the media. Fluctuation in distance (attachment position) between the edge
sensor and head is corrected. Correction is performed by measuring the distance from the
media edge to the print start position and adjusting the print start position so that it has a
standard distance.
8) Sensor (top) position adjustment

A function in the control firmware to correct the print start position in the feeding (top)
direction of the media. Fluctuation in distance (attachment position) between the edge
sensor and head is corrected. Correction is performed by measuring the distance from the
media edge to the print start position and adjusting the print start position so that it has a
standard distance.
9) Feeding adjustment
A function to adjust the media feeding length by the control firmware. It corrects the
difference in feeding length due to media characteristics (such as thickness), printing
mode, switching of the pressure of pressure roller, availability of the take-up reel unit and
sequence 1 or 2 of feeding mode to reduce banding (joint of passes).
10) Waiting interval and waiting time

A function used to execute scanning at the specified interval.
When the ink takes time to dry on some media, printing failures including blur can be
prevented by scanning after the ink dries completely.
11) Flattening operation

If standby status continues for a long period with the media set, the edge of the media roll
may become wrinkled or stained by humidity, dust, and others. These troubles cause blur
in print, nozzle blockage and head friction. This operation is executed to prevent such
cases. Feeding of the media roll edge to the front cover and flattening operation (repeating
of media feed and back feed) are executed.
8-28
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
12) Media advance mode

When using flexible media such as tarpaulin, the back of the media may stick to the paper
guide or the platen, and the feeding operation is interrupted.
In this case, execute media feeding in the sequence for sticking media. (Sequence 2)
The sequence 1 is the normal feeding sequence.
The sequence 2 is the sequence for the sticking media.
The sequence 2 printing takes longer than the sequence 1.
13) Media set mode

Detect the edge of the media when replacing/setting the media and select whether to put it
back into the waiting position.
When the take-up reel unit is activated, the media does not return to the waiting position
despite this setting.
8-29
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.6 Head driving principle
1) Head structure
The ink driving section in the head consists of three parts, i.e., the cover plate (see figure A
below), actuator with pectinate grooves on PZT (see figure B below), and nozzle plate
(see figure C below).
Nozzle holes are in every two grooves of the nozzle plate, and ink is supplied only to
grooves with nozzle holes.
Two actuators having the configuration mentioned above are attached together so that
cover plates can be positioned outside.
8-30
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Principle of operation
Electrodes are attached to both sides of the walls in the PZT groove. The electric potential
of electrodes on both sides of the groove with a nozzle is 0 V. On the other side,
electrodes on the opposite side of the walls are connected in order for the voltage to be
applied to eject the ink.
When the voltage is applied to the electrodes of nozzles from which you want ink to be
ejected, the walls are distorted outward and the cubic capacity of the actuator is increased.
When the voltage returns to 0 V, the distortion of the walls is recovered, as is the cubic
capacity of the actuator. Ink is ejected due to this change in the cubic capacity of the
actuator.
2) Driving waveforms
At tickling operaion, the waveform’s time width is shorter than at ejection operation.
1drop/dot
2drops/dot
3drops/dot
Tickling
8-31
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.7 Printing Mode
The printing modes supported by this printer are provided in the table below.
Upper numbers are the number of passes

2
Lower numbers are the printing speed (m /h)
Print resolution [dpi] Smart Pass
Print mode
Main scanning Sub scanning Low Medium High
High Speed 540 360 4 6 6
17.8 11.7 8.8
Normal 540 540 6 9 12
11.9 8.0 5.9
High Quality 720 720 8 12 16
7.2 4.7 3.6
Max Quality 900 900 10 15 20
4.7 3.1 2.4
8-32
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.8 LEECV (Low End Engine CVS) Board
8.8.1 Basic Structure

Figure 8.7 shows a block diagram that indicates the basic hardware configuration of the entire
IP-5620/IP-5520 system. As shown in the figure, this system comprises 6 basic blocks (shaded
areas).
Figure 8.6 Basic hardware configuration
8-33
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.8.2 Operation Mechanism of Engine Block

● Head board (head ASSY)
The head board is mounted with 254-nozzle piezo elements and 2 driver ICs, and
consists of 6 heads for 6 colors.
The head ASSY is connected to carriage board that outputs head signal by 30-pole
bracket cable. The drive voltage of head piezo element is regularly 27V (set by FW by
receiving temperature feedback), and the logic voltage is 5V.
● Carriage board (PCB-ASSY-LEC4)

The carriage board is located in the carriage and it controls the 6 head ASSYs.
Besides the data output to head, it contains head operation timing generation circuit,
a circuit for A/D conversion of the temperature detection voltage from the head, and a
fan for cooling the head when the head temperature is high. It also mounts edge
sensors for detecting media width and edge position (light-emitting diode current is
variable in 4 steps by FW) and a linear encoder (2-phase, for 180DPI).
Furthermore, a driver/receiver IC is mounted as a circuit for data transmission
between the carriage and the engine controller.
● Engine controller board (PCB-ASSY-LEECV)

The engine controller board is the core circuit block for this printing engine, and it
addresses the following functions:
(1) CPU
(One-chip 32bit CPU (SH-3))
(2) Memories
(SDRAM (program), PLCC-type FLASH memory (boot program),
TSOP-type FLASH memory (system program & test pattern, engine
parameter backup, ASIC data), SDRAM (band memory), CF card (for
program and FPGA data loading), EEPROM (for parameter storage)
(3) I/O (PIO, RTC)
(4) Computer interface (USB I/F)
(5) Ink chip communication
(6) X, Y and cap motor control (stepping motor), pump wiper motor control (DC
motor, PWM control), take-up motor control (ON/OFF control), suction fan
control (DC motor, PWM control), Y motor cooling fan control, power supply
cooling fan control
(7) Various sensors, mechanical SW port control
(8) Data path conversion (band memory control, data conversion, space
generation, print mode, bidirectional printing)
(9) Operation panel control (via special circuit: Built in special circuit for
communication and panel)
(10) DC power supply generation
(11) Heater control
● Service station
Capping unit: Executes head capping as well as suction.
Wiping unit: Executes wiping of the head nozzle surface.
8-34
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
● Ink box
The ink box is provided with slots to receive ink cartridges of all colors, and each slot
is equipped with a board (B1 board) which connects to the board on the ink cartridge
(C1 board) and enables communication with the ink chip on the cartridge.
● Ink cartridge
Ink is supplied to the head from the ink cartridge and there is no intermediate
sub-tank. The ink consumption from the ink cartridge is estimated from the ink
discharge count, and near-end is displayed when a certain volume has been
exceeded. The fact that the mark indicating low remaining ink level in the ink cartridge
is detected by a sensor, and the end is determined by certain ink discharge count
from this point. The ink cartridge mounts an IC chip with built-in nonvolatile memory
for recording the remaining ink level.
This memory records the ink ID, date of manufacture, etc. besides the remaining ink
level, and it is used for ink quality control. Communication with the nonvolatile
memory is implemented by the firmware via FPGA (RSM) on the engine controller
board.
● Harness connection board (PCB-ASSY-JUN1)

Sensors, switches, etc. assigned on the ink box side are wired from the engine
controller (LEECV board) with FFC (flexible flat cable) and are connected via the
harness connection board (JUN1 board).
● Mechanical control block

The main function of this block is to control the stepping motors such as carriage
motor and media feeding motor. It also controls the operations of various actuators
(capping motor, pump wipe motor, take-up, suction fan, etc.) in the service station and
ink supply system.
Motors
Name Type Voltage Control method Anomaly Remarks

detection
Media advance
Stepping motor 38V Pulse rate drive
motor (X motor)
Carriage motor
Stepping motor 38V Pulse rate drive
(Y motor)
Suction fan Lock PWM
Brushless DC fan 24V ON/OFF
(1 to 4) detection control possible
Capping motor Stepping motor 24V Pulse rate drive
PWM
Pump wipe motor DC motor 24V ON/OFF
control possible
Media take-up
DC motor 24V ON/OFF
motor
Power supply
DC fan 24V ON/OFF
cooling fan
Carriage motor
Brushless DC fan 24V ON/OFF
cooling fan
Lock PWM
Head cooling fan DC fan 24V ON/OFF
detection control possible
PWM
Blower unit Brushless DC fan 24V ON/OFF
control possible
8-35
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Sensors
Reading Meaning of Meaning of In case of

Name Type cable
method "L" "H" disconnection
Hall element H
Suction fan lock
(incorporated PIO input Rotation Locked
sensor (1 to 4)
in the fan)
Wiper switch Microswitch PIO input wipe sw: close wipe sw: open H
Capping switch Microswitch PIO input cape: open cape: close H
Media end or Media H
Media end sensor Microswitch PIO input
media is not set remaining
Separated photo No slack H
Slack sensor PIO input Slack detected
sensor detection
Lever switch PIO input H
Take-up function switch FACE DOWN Stopped
(ON-OFFON) (1)
PIO input H
FACE UP Stopped
(2)
Pulse H
Y encoder Linear encoder
calculation
Integrated photo Other than home Home H
Home position sensor PIO input
interrupter position position
Integrated photo H
Lever sensor PIO input Closed Open
interrupter
A/D H
Integrated photo
Media supply sensor conversion Media detected No detection
interrupter
input
A/D H
Integrated photo
Media output sensor conversion Media detected No detection
interrupter
input
Cover switches 1, 2 Microswitch PIO input Closed Open H
Hall element H
Carriage motor cooling
(incorporated in PIO input Rotation Lock
fan
the fan)
Waste ink bottle sensor Microswitch PIO input Bottle detected No bottle H
A/D L
Integrated photo
Edge sensor conversion (On platen) (On media)
interrupter
input
Environmental A/D H
(High (Low
temperature sensor Thermistor conversion
temperature) temperature)
(main unit) input
A/D H
Head temperature (High (Low
Thermistor conversion
sensor (PZT) temperature) temperature)
input
A/D H
Head temperature (High (Low
sensor (driver IC) temperature) temperature)
input
A/D L
Heater temperature (Low (High
sensor（Media feed side） temperature) temperature)
input
A/D L
Heater temperature (Low (High
sensor（Platen） temperature) temperature)
input
8-36
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Heater temperature A/D L

(Low (High
sensor（Media output Thermistor conversion
temperature) temperature)
side） input
Ink cartridge detection（1 Cartridge H
Identification PIO input No cartridge
to 6） detected
Integrated photo H
Ink empty sensor X6 PIO input Normal Ink end
interrupter
● Data path system

This block is a control block in the engine controller that receives data from the
computer, buffers and processes the data into a data for head transmission and
transmits the data to the head. All functions are addressed by the hardware.
● Band memory
This memory is physically separated from the previously described memories (CPU
system + work RAM), and it is the memory area for band image that temporarily
stores the image data transmitted from a higher device. It is capable of directly writing
the image from CPU, and the test pattern is generated as such. In addition, image is
written directly into the band memory from the upper stream USB interface without
going through the CPU.
Image data transmission from the computer to the print engine is performed in the
line-sequential method.
The band is called "band" because it maintains the data necessary for 1 scan for
starting 1 scan.
However, the image data sequence stored internally varies by the printing mode (high
speed, normal).
[Band memory specification]

(1) Memory capacity: 192MB mounted
(2) Memory used: 256Mbit synchronous DRAM
(3) Power supply voltage: +3.3V
● ATG (ADDRESS TIMING GENERATOR) block

This block writes into and reads from the band memory (SDRAM). Writing is
implemented in the scanning direction and reading is implemented in the nozzle
direction (in this system, the scanning direction and the nozzle assignment direction
are straight).
This enables orthogonal conversion.
[ATG function]
(1) Block unit memory access
(2) Memory address generation
(3) SYNCRONOUS DRAM timing generation
(4) Mirror processing (bit swap: forward →, backward ←)
8-37
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
● RSM (Rotation and SDRAM Manager) block

This block implements various processes including addition of print margin on both
sides depending on the printing mode and mirror processing for bidirectional printing
(bit swap), and transmits the data to the later PTG block.
[RSM function]
(1) Orthogonal conversion (horizontal and vertical conversion)
(2) X direction dummy data addition (main scan masking)
(3) Y direction dummy data addition (subscan masking)
(4) PTG transmission (PTG interface)
(5) Masking process. Depending on the printing mode (540 x 540 dpi, 6 passes,
bidirectional printing, etc.) and smart pass (low, medium, high), data from
the scanned line or column is masked.
● Head data transmission FIFO

This FIFO is incorporated in the PTG block. It functions as an intermediate buffer for
transmitting the 2-value head data converted for head nozzle assignment from RSM
to each of the six heads.
● PTG (PIXEL TIMING GENERATOR) block

This block implements serial transmission of the head data converted by the previous
RSM block (data converted for nozzle assignment) to the driver ICs inside the six
head ASSYs (there are two driver ICs in each head) and synchronizes to the
discharge timing from the linear scale to adjust the various timings for ink discharge
at the desired timing.
[Head control functions of PTG]

(1) Generation of 720 dpi discharge rate (fire rate)
(2) Fire timing adjustment
For each of the six heads, position shifting in the scanning direction is set as
a parameter to make minute adjustment of discharge timing. Specifically,
each fire interval is divided into 16 divisions to add the desired delay onto
the firing timing. For firmware, a half of it (eight divisions) is used.
(3) Unidirectional/bidirectional printing
Bidirectional printing is the basic operation. Thus change in head control by
the printing direction is also set as a parameter to make minute adjustments
of the discharge timing.
● Image interface
A low-voltage differential driver/receiver is adopted as the driver/receiver for image
interface to the carriage board.
●Head drive voltage control

The head drive voltage is supplied with a variable voltage VDD2 created on the LEC4
board based on the +38V generated from the power supply unit.
Furthermore, the optimal operation voltage varies at any time depending on the head
temperature, and the operation to read the head temperature and feed it back to the
operation voltage is repeated while the system is printing.
8-38
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
● Operation panel (PCB-ASSY-MCP4)

This is the operation panel for inputting various parameters and displaying various
data for this printer. The operation panel is provided with a LCD module for display
and a key top for key input. Furthermore, the operation panel is controlled directly by
the CPU of the engine controller (via BTC). Therefore output of print adjustment
pattern and input of various maintenance functions can also be implemented from
this operation panel.
[Operation panel specifications]

(1) LCD 20 characters, 2 lines
Alphabetical, numerical and Japanese
Katakana characters (with backlight)
(2) Key top Power supply, ←, ↑, ↓, →, Input, Menu,
Cancel, Heater, Online, Test print, print head
recovery
(3) LED Online, Data, Error, Ink, Media
(4) Power supply voltage 5V
(5) Interface TTL, serial communication method
(6) Buzzer Separately excited
● DC power supply generation

The power supply to this system uses the general-purpose power supply of AC
input/DC38V single output. The DC voltage necessary in each block is generated on
the engine controller (LEECV board).(VDD2 is generated on LEC4 board.)
- +5V ...Logic power supply, +3.3V, +1.9V, +1.5V regulator source
- +12V ...Power supply cooling fan, +4.096V regulator source, interlock relay coil
drive, heater drive IC power supply,head cooling fan
- +24V ...Capping motor, pump wiper motor, take-up motor, suction fan, Y motor
cooling fan, media cooling fan
- VDD2 ...Head operation voltage source
- +38V ...Y motor, X motor
● DC power supply control

The DC power supply control for this system is performed by the CPU of the engine
controller (LEECV board).
For details, see the section for the power supply unit.
● TRC-CV board
The TRC-CV board addresses the following functions:
(1) Using a triac, turn ON/OFF the AC power supply to the preheater.
(2) Using a triac, turn ON/OFF the AC power supply to the print heater.
(3) Using a triac, turn ON/OFF the AC power supply to the after heater.
(4) Generate the AC zero-cross signal using a photo coupler and supply it to the
engine controller (LEECV board).
● Preheater
A heat source to heat up the paper guide on the paper output side. A foil heater is
used.
Increase in temperature is monitored in two stages by the temperature thermistor of
the engine firmware and a hardware thermostat.
● Print heater
A heat source to heat up the platen. A linear heater is used.
Increase in temperature is monitored in the same way as the above preheater.
8-39
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
● After heater
A heat source to heat up the paper guide on the paper feed side. A foil heater is used.
Increase in temperature is monitored in the same way as the above preheater.
● Voltage changeover switch (SW)

A switch to change the voltage according to the supply voltage. Each heater has two
circuits inside.
In the case of 100V power supply, the two circuits are connected in parallel. In the
case of 200V power supply, the two circuits are connected in series. There are 3
switches to change over circuit connections of each heater.
【Heater section control】

The engine controller (LEECV board) CPU controls the heaters.
The CPU reads heater temperature from the temperature detecting device
(thermistor) attached to each heater. The CPU adjusts the actual temperature close
to the preset temperature by applying or shielding the current to the heater.
8-40
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.9 Engine Control Firmware
8.9.1 Function Block

● USB/Engine firmware function block
Figure 8.7 USB/engine firmware function block diagram
8.9.2 Operation Mechanism

[Operation mechanism: USB/engine firmware function block]
The USB/engine firmware is a firmware that operates on the LEECV board and that controls
the various parts of the engine and the USB interface.
The main function blocks of the USB/engine firmware are provided as follows:
- Operation panel driver: Controls input/output of LCD, LED, keys and buzzers on the
operation panel.
- USB driver : Controls the USB interface.
- Mechanic control driver: Controls various actuators to address the printing operation of the
mechanical system and maintenance of the ink system.
- Maintenance driver : Controls the serial interface for maintenance console.
- Temperature correction task : Monitors the thermistors.
- Sensor monitoring task : Monitors the sensors.
- Setup task : Addresses various operations via the operation panel and
prints various built-in patterns.
- FLASH driver : Executes read/write on FLASH memory.
- Ink IC chip driver : Executes Read/Write on the IC chips that are built into the ink
cartridge.
- Anomaly monitoring task : Monitors the sensors and engine anomalies.
- Printing task : Manages the band memory and controls printing data.
8-41
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.10 Power Supply Unit
The power supply to this system uses the following general-purpose power supply:
Model : LEP240F-36-S
Manufacturer : Cosel
8.10.1 Electrical Specifications

- AC input specifications
1) Input voltage 85V AC to 264V AV
2) Input frequency 47HZ to 63HZ
3) Number of phases Single phase
- DC output specifications
No. Item Output
1 Rated output
+38V
voltage
2 Rated output
0 to 6.7A
current
3 Peak current 13.4A
4 Voltage setting
37.0 to 39.0V
accuracy
8.10.2 Connector Specifications

● CN1
Pin Signal name

number
1 AC (LIVE)
2
3 AC (NEUTRAL)
4
5 FG (FRAME GND)
● CN2
Pin Signal name

number
1 -V(GND)
2 -V(GND)
3 -V(GND)
4 -V(GND)
5 +V(+38V)
6 +V(+38V)
7 +V(+38V)
8 +V(+38V)
8-42
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.10.3 ON/OFF Sequence

The following shows the state transition for power supply ON/OFF. The panel SW is the power
supply switch on the operation panel.
The power supply is turned ON for the printer as follows:

Vsub5V (including Vsub3.3V) on the LEECV board is turned ON by plugging
the power cord into the power outlet. +5V on the LEECV board turns ON
with the panel SW ON, and then the CPU turns ON the +12V. For the
operation that involves initial operation (diagnosis included), printing
operation and other actuator driving, the firmware turns ON/OFF the +36V,
+24V and P36V_LEC.
The power supply is turned OFF as follows:

OFF of panel SW is detected by CPU. After the CPU turns OFF +12V (when
ON/OFF for +36V, +24V and P36V_LEC is started, it is also turned OFF)
and finally turns OFF +5V, and the state becomes panel SW ON waiting
state.
Figure 8.8 Power supply ON/OFF transition diagram
8-43
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.10.4 Others
(1) Overcurrent protection/overvoltage protection (general-purpose power supply)
Overcurrent protection: Operates at 101% [min.] of the peak current, automatic recovery.
Overvoltage protection: Operates at 115 - 140% of the rated voltage. Recovery by
rebooting the power supply.
(2) Interlock cutting (DC power supply)

When the interlock on equipment side is broken, the main 36V that is input in the circuit
that generates +36V, and +24V on engine controller (LEECV board) is forcibly
interrupted via relay. It does not affect other voltage (+5V, +12V).
Note
It must be noted that the general-purpose power supply and the Vsub5V (including
Vsub3.3V) circuit on the LEECV board are operating even when the panel SW is turned
OFF.
8-44
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
8.11 Blower Unit Overview
Drying condition of the printed media of IP-5620/IP-5520 using solvent ink depends on the air
flow (encourage volatilization by sending air containing fewer solvent elements).
The basic principle of the dryer is to dry printed materials by sending air.
Printout
Blower unit
Fan air flow
Figure 8.9 Operation principle of blower unit
8-45
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix
APPENDIX
The followings shows the electrical connection diagrams of IP-5620/IP-5520.
A-1
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix
APPENDIX A-1 IP-5620 Electrical connection diagram-1
A-2
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix
A-3
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix
A-4
SIIT CONFIDENTIAL
Appendix
A-5

w-640s-IP-5620 5520 MM 05 E

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

w-640s-IP-5620 5520 MM 05 E

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

IP-5620/5520

Solvent Ink Color Inkjet Printer

U00122916300 March 2011

Copyright © 2013 by Seiko I Infotech Inc.

This maintenance manual applies to the following four printer models:

Caution (make sure to read the following)

SECTION 1 OVERVIEW OF MAINTENANCE WORKFLOW 1-1

2.2 Procedure to Replace Printer's Ink between EG-Outdoor GX and

2.2.3 Change between IX ink and neon ink .....................................................53

SECTION 3 OPERATIONS AND FUNCTIONS OF MAINTENANCE

3.4 Menu Operation .................................................................................. 3-15

3.4.5 ADJUST Menu ..................................................................................................... 3-31

3.5 Special Operations ............................................................................. 3-63

3.6 Operation Guidance............................................................................ 3-65

3.7 Management of System Information ................................................... 3-71

SECTION 4 TROUBLESHOOTING (GENERAL) 4-1

SECTION 5 TROUBLESHOOTING (ENGINE SECTION AND USB

5.4.8 Take-up Time-out Warning ....................................................................................5-11

5.5 System Errors ..................................................................................... 5-12

5.6 Firmware Program Upgrade ............................................................... 5-39

5.7 Upload/download ................................................................................ 5-44

5.7.2 Download ............................................................................................................. 5-44

5.8 Settings when Replacing Engine Board (LEECV) ............................... 5-45

5.10 Replacing the Battery (LEECV Board)................................................ 5-48

SECTION 6 REPLACEMENT OF PARTS

6.3 Disassembling and Reassembling Exterior Parts .................................. 6-3

6.4 Disassembling and Reassembling Y Driver ........................................ 6-16

6.5 Disassembling and Reassembling X Driver ........................................ 6-49

6.5.2 SUCTION FAN ASSY ........................................................................................... 6-52

6.6 Disassembling and Reassembling Controller Box ............................... 6-56

6.7 Disassembling/Reassembling Head and Carriage .............................. 6-62

6.8 Disassembling and Reassembling WIPING-UNIT-CV ......................... 6-88

6.9 Disassembling and Reassembling CAPPING-UNIT-CV ...................... 6-91

6.10 Disassembling and Reassembling Ink Cartridge Section ................... 6-99

6.11 Disassembling and Reassembling Heater Section ........................... 6-106

6.12 Disassembling and Reassembling TAKE UP REEL UNIT, FEEDING-UNIT

6.13 BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY and REASSEMBLY ....................... 6-120

SECTION 7 ADJUSTMENT 7-1

SECTION 8 OPERATION MECHANISM 8-15

8.9 Engine Control Firmware .................................................................... 8-41

8.10 Power Supply Unit ............................................................................. 8-42

8.11 Blower Unit Overview ......................................................................... 8-45

SECTION 1 OVERVIEW OF MAINTENANCE

1.1 Maintenance Workflow

Check and clean parts. Conduct troubleshooting

Make sure that the problem has been

Figure 1.1 Maintenance workflow End

1.2 Necessary Tools

Table 1-1 Tools and measuring instruments (1/2)

Name Quantity Remarks

Phillips screwdriver (2 bits) 1 Commercially available

Table 1-1 Tools and measuring instruments (2/2)

Name Quantity Remarks

Fan-shaped tension gauge (0.1 to 20 N) 1 For X motor installation

1.3 External Views and Part Names

Figure 1.2 External view and part names (front)

(13) Exhaust attachment attaching part

Figure 1.3 External view and part names (rear)

Printer Heater Section

Media feed direction

(22) Preheater Pre-heats the media

＊:These three heaters are controlled individually.

Figure 1.4 Heater names and locations (sectional view)